A-Level Physics Exam Questions

Page 32 15. A student constructs a simple air-insulated capacitor using two parallel metal plates, each of area A, separated by a distance d. The plates are separated using small insulating spacers as shown in Figure 15A. metal plates capacitance meter d air gap insulating spacer Figure 15A The capacitance C of the capacitor is given by 0 A C ε d = The student investigates how the capacitance depends on the separation of the plates. The student uses a capacitance meter to measure the capacitance for different plate separations. The plate separation is measured using a ruler. The results are used to plot the graph shown in Figure 15B. The area of each metal plate is 9·0 × 10−2 m2. 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 Figure 15B y = 8·3x − 0.20 C (× 10−10 F) (× 103 m−1 ) 0.80 1.00 1.20 1 d Page 33 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. (continued) (a) (i) Use information from the graph to determine a value for εo, the permittivity of free space. Space for working and answer (ii) Use your calculated value for the permittivity of free space to determine a value for the speed of light in air. Space for working and answer (b) The best fit line on the graph does not pass through the origin as theory predicts. Suggest a reason for this. [Turn over 3 3 1 Page 34 [BLANK PAGE] do not write on this page Page 35 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 16. A student uses two methods to determine the moment of inertia of a solid sphere about an axis through its centre. (a) In the first method the student measures the mass of the sphere to be 3·8 kg and the radius to be 0·053 m. Calculate the moment of inertia of the sphere. Space for working and answer (b) In the second method, the student uses conservation of energy to determine the moment of inertia of the sphere. The following equation describes the conservation of energy as the sphere rolls down the slope 2 2 1 1 2 2 mgh mv Iω = + where the symbols have their usual meanings. The equation can be rearranged to give the following expression 2 2 2 1 I gh v mr ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ This expression is in the form of the equation of a straight line through the origin, y gradient x = × [Turn over 3 Page 36 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 16. (b) (continued) The student measures the height of the slope h. The student then allows the sphere to roll down the slope and measures the final speed of the sphere v at the bottom of the slope as shown in Figure 16. data logger not to scale Figure 16 light gate height of slope, h The following is an extract from the student’s notebook. h (m) v (m s−1) 2gh (m2 s−2) v2 (m2 s−2) 0·020 0·42 0·39 0·18 0·040 0·63 0·78 0·40 0·060 0·68 1·18 0·46 0·080 0·95 1·57 0·90 0·100 1·05 1·96 1·10 m = 3·8 kg r = 0·053 m (i) On the square-ruled paper on Page 37, draw a graph that would allow the student to determine the moment of inertia of the sphere. (ii) Use the gradient of your line to determine the moment of inertia of the sphere. Space for working and answer 3 3 Page 37 (An additional square-ruled paper, if required, can be found on Page 42.) [Turn over for next question Page 38 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 16. (continued) (c) The student states that more confidence should be placed in the value obtained for the moment of inertia in the second method. Use your knowledge of experimental physics to comment on the student’s statement. [END OF QUESTION PAPER] 3 Page 39 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional diagram for Question 2 (b) (ii) r Figure 2C ω Additional diagram for Question 5 (b) (i) A B spacecraft accelerating in this direction Figure 5A Page 40 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional diagram for Question 5 (b) (ii) spacecraft moving at a constant speed A B Figure 5B Additional diagram for Question 7 (b) (ii) 0 500 1000 1500 2000 λ (nm) Intensity curve A curve B Figure 7 Page 41 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional diagram for Question 10 (c) (ii) time 0 displacement from equilibrium position Additional diagram for Question 13 (b) (iii) Q2 Q1 Figure 13C Page 42 Page 43 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Page 44 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK

Page 45 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Question 1 – Calvin Chan/shutterstock.com © National Qualications 2016 AH X757/77/11 Physics Relationships Sheet TUESDAY, 24 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/HTP Page 02 Relationships required for Physics Advanced Higher dt ds v  a dv dt d2s dt 2 v uat s ut 1 2 at 2 v2 u2 2as d dt d dt d2 dt 2 o t ot 1 2t 2 2 o 2 2 s r v r at r ar v2 r r2 F mv2 r mr2 T Fr T I L mvr mr2 L I EK 1 2 I2 2 r Mm G F  r GM V   r GM v 2  2 4 , brightness apparent r L b   Power per unit area T4 L 4r2T4 rSchwarzschild2GM c2 E hf h p mvr nh 2  4 h p x x     4 h t E    F qvB 2f a d2y dt 2 2y Page 03 y Acost or y Asint v (A2 y2) EK 1 2 m2(A2 y2) EP 1 2 m2y2 y Asin2( ft x ) 2x  .... 2 ,1 ,0 where 2 1 or difference path optical        m m m   x l 2d d  4n x D d n taniP F Q1Q2 4or2 E  Q 4or2 V  Q 4or F QE V Ed F IlBsin B oI 2r c  1 oo t RC XC V I XC  1 2fC L dI dt E 1 2 LI2 XL V I XL 2fL 2 2 2                       Z Z Y Y X X W W 2 2 2 Z Y X W        x l 2d d  4n x D d n taniP F Q1Q2 4or2 E  Q 4or2 V  Q 4or F QE V Ed F IlBsin B oI 2r 2x  .... 2 ,1 ,0 where 2 1 or difference path optical        m m m   = E k 2 A Page 04 Vpeak  2Vrms s v t E mc2 Ipeak  2Irms v uat hf E  Q It s ut 1 2 at 2 EK hf hf0 V IR v2 u2 2as E2 E1 hf P IV I2R V 2 R s 1 2 u v  t T 1 f RT R1 R2 .... W mg v f 1 RT 1 R1 1 R2 .... F ma dsinm E V Ir EW Fd n sin1 sin2 V1  R1 R1 R2    VS EP mgh sin1 sin2 1 2 v1 v2 V1 V2 R1 R2 EK 1 2 mv2 sinc 1 n C Q V P E t I k d2 E 1 2 QV 1 2 CV 2 1 2 Q2 C p mv I P A Ft mvmu 2 r Mm G F  t  t 1vc 2 l l 1v c 2 fo fs v v vs     z observed rest rest z v c v H0d d v t EW QV path difference m or m 1 2     where m 0, 1, 2... random uncertainty max. value - min. value number of values Page 05 Additional Relationships Circle Table of standard derivatives Table of standard integrals circumference= 2πr area = πr2 Sphere Trigonometry Moment of inertia area = 4πr2 volume = πr3 point mass I = mr2 rod about centre I = ml2 rod about end I = ml2 disc about centre I = mr2 sphere about centre I = mr2 f (x) f '(x) sinax acosax cosax – asinax f (x) f (x)dx sinax cosax +C cosax sinax +C 1 a 1 a 4 3 θ θ θ θ θ = = = + = 2 2 sin cos tan sin cos 1 opposite hypotenuse adjacent hypotenuse opposite adjacent 1 12 1 3 1 2 2 5 ∫ Page 06 1 H 1 Hydrogen 3 Li 2, 1 Lithium 4 Be 2, 2 Beryllium 11 Na 2, 8, 1 Sodium 12 Mg 2, 8, 2 Magnesium 19 K 2, 8, 8, 1 Potassium 20 Ca 2, 8, 8, 2 Calcium 37 Rb 2, 8, 18, 8, 1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2, 8, 18, 8, 2 Strontium 55 Cs 2, 8, 18, 18, 8, 1 Caesium 56 Ba 2, 8, 18, 18, 8, 2 Barium 87 Fr 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 8, 1 Francium 88 Ra 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 8, 2 Radium 21 Sc 2, 8, 9, 2 Scandium 22 Ti 2, 8, 10, 2 Titanium 39 Y 2, 8, 18, 9, 2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2, 8, 18, 10, 2 Zirconium 57 La 2, 8, 18, 18, 9, 2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2, 8, 18, 32, 10, 2 Hafnium 89 Ac 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 9, 2 Actinium 104 Rf 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 10, 2 Rutherfordium 23 V 2, 8, 11, 2 Vanadium 41 Nb 2, 8, 18, 12, 1 Niobium 73 Ta 2, 8, 18, 32, 11, 2 Tantalum 105 Db 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 11, 2 Dubnium 24 Cr 2, 8, 13, 1 Chromium 42 Mo 2, 8, 18, 13, 1 Molybdenum 74 W 2, 8, 18, 32, 12, 2 Tungsten 106 Sg 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 12, 2 Seaborgium 25 Mn 2, 8, 13, 2 Manganese 43 Tc 2, 8, 18, 13, 2 Technetium 75 Re 2, 8, 18, 32, 13, 2 Rhenium 107 Bh 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 13, 2 Bohrium 26 Fe 2, 8, 14, 2 Iron 44 Ru 2, 8, 18, 15, 1 Ruthenium 76 Os 2, 8, 18, 32, 14, 2 Osmium 108 Hs 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 14, 2 Hassium 27 Co 2, 8, 15, 2 Cobalt 45 Rh 2, 8, 18, 16, 1 Rhodium 77 Ir 2, 8, 18, 32, 15, 2 Iridium 109 Mt 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 15, 2 Meitnerium 28 Ni 2, 8, 16, 2 Nickel 46 Pd 2, 8, 18, 18, 0 Palladium 78 Pt 2, 8, 18, 32, 17, 1 Platinum 29 Cu 2, 8, 18, 1 Copper 47 Ag 2, 8, 18, 18, 1 Silver 79 Au 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 1 Gold 30 Zn 2, 8, 18, 2 Zinc 48 Cd 2, 8, 18, 18, 2 Cadmium 80 Hg 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 2 Mercury 5 B 2, 3 Boron 13 Al 2, 8, 3 Aluminium 31 Ga 2, 8, 18, 3 Gallium 49 In 2, 8, 18, 18, 3 Indium 81 Tl 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 3 Thallium 6 C 2, 4 Carbon 14 Si 2, 8, 4 Silicon 32 Ge 2, 8, 18, 4 Germanium 50 Sn 2, 8, 18, 18, 4 Tin 82 Pb 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 4 Lead 7 N 2, 5 Nitrogen 15 P 2, 8, 5 Phosphorus 33 As 2, 8, 18, 5 Arsenic 51 Sb 2, 8, 18, 18, 5 Antimony 83 Bi 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 5 Bismuth 8 O 2, 6 Oxygen 16 S 2, 8, 6 Sulphur 34 Se 2, 8, 18, 6 Selenium 52 Te 2, 8, 18, 18, 6 Tellurium 84 Po 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 6 Polonium 9 F 2, 7 Fluorine 17 Cl 2, 8, 7 Chlorine 35 Br 2, 8, 18, 7 Bromine 53 I 2, 8, 18, 18, 7 Iodine 85 At 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 7 Astatine 10 Ne 2, 8 Neon 18 Ar 2, 8, 8 Argon 36 Kr 2, 8, 18, 8 Krypton 54 Xe 2, 8, 18, 18, 8 Xenon 86 Rn 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 8 Radon 2 He 2 Helium 57 La 2, 8, 18, 18, 9, 2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2, 8, 18, 20, 8, 2 Cerium 59 Pr 2, 8, 18, 21, 8, 2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2, 8, 18, 22, 8, 2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2, 8, 18, 23, 8, 2 Promethium 62 Sm 2, 8, 18, 24, 8, 2 Samarium 63 Eu 2, 8, 18, 25, 8, 2 Europium 64 Gd 2, 8, 18, 25, 9, 2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2, 8, 18, 27, 8, 2 Terbium 66 Dy 2, 8, 18, 28, 8, 2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2, 8, 18, 29, 8, 2 Holmium 68 Er 2, 8, 18, 30, 8, 2 Erbium 69 Tm 2, 8, 18, 31, 8, 2 Thulium 70 Yb 2, 8, 18, 32, 8, 2 Ytterbium 89 Ac 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 9, 2 Actinium 90 Th 2, 8, 18, 32, 18, 10, 2 Thorium 91 Pa 2, 8, 18, 32, 20, 9, 2 Protactinium 92 U 2, 8, 18, 32, 21, 9, 2 Uranium 93 Np 2, 8, 18, 32, 22, 9, 2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2, 8, 18, 32, 24, 8, 2 Plutonium 95 Am 2, 8, 18, 32, 25, 8, 2 Americium 96 Cm 2, 8, 18, 32, 25, 9, 2 Curium 97 Bk 2, 8, 18, 32, 27, 8, 2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2, 8, 18, 32, 28, 8, 2 Californium 99 Es 2, 8, 18, 32, 29, 8, 2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2, 8, 18, 32, 30, 8, 2 Fermium 101 Md 2, 8, 18, 32, 31, 8, 2 Mendelevium 102 No 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 8, 2 Nobelium 71 Lu 2, 8, 18, 32, 9, 2 Lutetium 103 Lr 2, 8, 18, 32, 32, 9, 2 Lawrencium Electron Arrangements of Elements Group 1 (1) Group 2 (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) Group 3 (13) Group 4 (14) Group 5 (15) Group 6 (16) Group 7 (17) Group 0 (18) Transition Elements Lanthanides Actinides Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name Key Page 07 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 08 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE

Page 03 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. A car accelerates uniformly from rest. The car travels a distance of 60 m in 6·0 s. The acceleration of the car is A 0·83 m s−2 B 3·3 m s−2 C 5·0 m s−2 D 10 m s−2 E 20 m s−2. 2. A ball is thrown vertically upwards and falls back to Earth. Neglecting air resistance, which velocity-time graph represents its motion? A v t 0 v t 0 v t 0 v t 0 v t 0 D B E C [Turn over

Page 04 3. A block of wood slides with a constant velocity down a slope. The slope makes an angle of 30º with the horizontal as shown. The mass of the block is 2·0 kg. motion 30° 2·0 kg The magnitude of the force of friction acting on the block is A 1·0 N B 1·7 N C 9·8 N D 17·0 N E 19·6 N. 4. The graph shows the force which acts on an object over a time interval of 8·0 seconds. force (N) time (s) 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 2·0 4·0 6·0 8·0 10·0 The momentum gained by the object during this 8·0 seconds is A 12 kg m s−1 B 32 kg m s−1 C 44 kg m s−1 D 52 kg m s−1 E 72 kg m s−1.

Page 05 5. A planet orbits a star at a distance of 3·0 × 109 m. The star exerts a gravitational force of 1·6 × 1027 N on the planet. The mass of the star is 6·0 × 1030 kg. The mass of the planet is A 2·4 × 1014 kg B 1·2 × 1016 kg C 3·6 × 1025 kg D 1·6 × 1026 kg E 2·4 × 1037 kg. 6. A car horn emits a sound with a constant frequency of 405 Hz. The car is travelling away from a student at 28·0 m s−1. The speed of sound in air is 335 m s−1. The frequency of the sound from the horn heard by the student is A 371 Hz B 374 Hz C 405 Hz D 439 Hz E 442 Hz. [Turn over

Page 06 7. The graphs show how the radiation per unit surface area, R, varies with the wavelength, λ, of the emitted radiation for two stars, P and Q. R (units) λ (μm) star Q star P 0 A student makes the following conclusions based on the information in the graph. I Star P is hotter than star Q. II Star P emits more radiation per unit surface area than star Q. III The peak intensity of the radiation from star Q is at a shorter wavelength than that from star P. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E II and III only 8. One type of hadron consists of two down quarks and one up quark. The charge on a down quark is −¹⁄₃. The charge on an up quark is +²⁄₃. Which row in the table shows the charge and type for this hadron? charge type of hadron A 0 baryon B +1 baryon C −1 meson D 0 meson E +1 meson

Page 07 9. A student makes the following statements about sub-nuclear particles. I The force mediating particles are bosons. II Gluons are the mediating particles of the strong force. III Photons are the mediating particles of the electromagnetic force. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D II and III only E I, II and III 10. The last two changes in a radioactive decay series are shown below. A Bismuth nucleus emits a beta particle and its product, a Polonium nucleus, emits an alpha particle. ȕ Į ⎯⎯⎯→ ⎯⎯⎯→ P R 208 Q S 82 decay decay Bi Po Pb Which numbers are represented by P, Q, R and S? P Q R S A 210 83 208 81 B 210 83 210 84 C 211 85 207 86 D 212 83 212 84 E 212 85 212 84 [Turn over

Page 08 11. The table below shows the threshold frequency of radiation for photoelectric emission for some metals. Metal Threshold frequency (Hz) sodium 4·4 × 1014 potassium 5·4 × 1014 zinc 6·9 × 1014 Radiation of frequency 6·3 × 1014 Hz is incident on the surface of each of the metals. Photoelectric emission occurs from A sodium only B zinc only C potassium only D sodium and potassium only E zinc and potassium only. 12. Radiation of frequency 9·00 × 1015 Hz is incident on a clean metal surface. The maximum kinetic energy of a photoelectron ejected from this surface is 5·70 × 10−18 J. The work function of the metal is A 2·67 × 10−19 J B 5·97 × 10−18 J C 1·17 × 10−17 J D 2·07 × 10−2 J E 9·60 × 10−1 J.

Page 09 13. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on a grating as shown. monochromatic light grating central maximum first order maximum first order maximum 36° The wavelength of the light is 633 nm. The separation of the slits on the grating is A 1·96 × 10−7 m B 1·08 × 10−6 m C 2·05 × 10−6 m D 2·15 × 10−6 m E 4·10 × 10−6 m. 14. Light travels from glass into air. Which row in the table shows what happens to the speed, frequency and wavelength of the light as it travels from glass into air? Speed Frequency Wavelength A decreases stays constant decreases B decreases increases stays constant C stays constant increases increases D increases increases stays constant E increases stays constant increases 15. The irradiance of light from a point source is 32 W m−2 at a distance of 4·0 m from the source. The irradiance of the light at a distance of 16 m from the source is A 0·125 W m−2 B 0·50 W m−2 C 2·0 W m−2 D 8·0 W m−2 E 128 W m−2. [Turn over

Page 10 16. Part of the energy level diagram for an atom is shown X Y E2 E1 E0 X and Y represent two possible electron transitions. A student makes the following statements about transitions X and Y. I Transition Y produces photons of higher frequency than transition X II Transition X produces photons of longer wavelength than transition Y III When an electron is in the energy level E0, the atom is ionised. Which of the statements is/are correct? A I only B I and II only C I and III only D II and III only E I, II and III

Page 11 17. The output of a signal generator is connected to the input of an oscilloscope. The trace produced on the screen of the oscilloscope is shown. div div The timebase control of the oscilloscope is set at 2 ms/div. The Y-gain control of the oscilloscope is set at 4 mV/div. Which row in the table shows the frequency and peak voltage of the output of the signal generator? frequency (Hz) peak voltage (mV) A 0·5 12 B 0·5 6 C 250 6 D 500 12 E 500 24 [Turn over

Page 12 18. A potential divider circuit is set up as shown. +12 V 0 V 3·0 kΩ 7·0 kΩ The potential difference across the 7·0 kΩ resistor is A 3·6 V B 4·0 V C 5·1 V D 8·4 V E 9·0 V.

Page 13 19. A circuit is set up as shown. 12 V 4·0 Ω A The resistance of the variable resistor is increased and corresponding readings on the ammeter are recorded. Resistance (Ω) 2·0 4·0 6·0 8·0 Current (A) 2·0 1·5 1·2 1·0 These results show that as the resistance of the variable resistor increases the power dissipated in the variable resistor A increases B decreases C remains constant D decreases and then increases E increases and then decreases. 20. A 20 μF capacitor is connected to a 12 V d.c. supply. The maximum charge stored on the capacitor is A 1·4 × 10−3 C B 2·4 × 10−4 C C 1·2 × 10−4 C D 1·7 × 10−6 C E 6·0 × 10−7 C. [END OF SECTION 1. NOW ATTEMPT THE QUESTIONS IN SECTION 2 OF YOUR QUESTION AND ANSWER BOOKLET] Page 14 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 15 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 16 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE H FOR OFFICIAL USE Fill in these boxes and read what is printed below. Number of seat Town © Mark Full name of centre Forename(s) Surname Scottish candidate number Date of birth Year Day Month National Qualications 2016 Total marks — 130 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions. Instructions for the completion of Section 1 are given on Page 02. SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions. Reference may be made to the Data Sheet on Page 02 of the question paper X757/76/02 and to the Relationships Sheet X757/76/11. Care should be taken to give an appropriate number of significant figures in the final answers to calculations. Write your answers clearly in the spaces provided in this booklet. Additional space for answers and rough work is provided at the end of this booklet. If you use this space you must clearly identify the question number you are attempting. Any rough work must be written in this booklet. You should score through your rough work when you have written your final copy. Use blue or black ink. Before leaving the examination room you must give this booklet to the Invigilator; if you do not, you may lose all the marks for this paper. X757/76/01 TUESDAY, 24 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB Physics Section 1 — Answer Grid and Section 2 Page 02 SECTION 1 — 20 marks The questions for Section 1 are contained in the question paper X757/76/02. Read these and record your answers on the answer grid on Page 03 opposite. Use blue or black ink. Do NOT use gel pens or pencil. 1. The answer to each question is either A, B, C, D or E. Decide what your answer is, then fill in the appropriate bubble (see sample question below). 2. There is only one correct answer to each question. 3. Any rough work must be written in the additional space for answers and rough work at the end of this booklet. Sample Question The energy unit measured by the electricity meter in your home is the: A ampere B kilowatt-hour C watt D coulomb E volt. The correct answer is B — kilowatt-hour. The answer B bubble has been clearly filled in (see below). A B C D E Changing an answer If you decide to change your answer, cancel your first answer by putting a cross through it (see below) and fill in the answer you want. The answer below has been changed to D. A B C D E If you then decide to change back to an answer you have already scored out, put a tick (3) to the right of the answer you want, as shown below: A B C D E or A B C D E Page 03 A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SECTION 1 — Answer Grid [Turn over Page 04 [BLANK PAGE] do not write on this page Page 05 [Turn over for SECTION 2 do not write on this page Page 06 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. 9·1 m s−1 24° P Q sh not to scale An athlete takes part in a long jump competition. The athlete takes off from point P with an initial velocity of 9·1 m s−1 at an angle of 24º to the horizontal and lands at point Q. (a) Calculate: (i) the vertical component of the initial velocity of the athlete; Space for working and answer (ii) the horizontal component of the initial velocity of the athlete. Space for working and answer 1 1 Page 07 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (continued) (b) Show that the time taken for the athlete to travel from P to Q is 0·76 s. Space for working and answer (c) Calculate the horizontal displacement sh between points P and Q. Space for working and answer (d) The graph shows how the horizontal displacement of the athlete varies with time for this jump when air resistance is ignored. displacement (m) time (s) sh 0 Add a line to the graph to show how the horizontal displacement of the athlete varies with time when air resistance is taken into account. (An additional graph, if required can be found on Page 38) 2 3 2 [Turn over Page 08 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. A student uses the apparatus shown to investigate the force of friction between the wheels of a toy car and a carpet. toy car ramp h d carpet not to scale The toy car is released from rest, from a height h. It then travels down the ramp and along the carpet before coming to rest. The student measures the distance d that the car travels along the carpet. The student repeats the procedure several times and records the following measurements and uncertainties. Mass of car, m : (0·20 ± 0·01) kg Height, h : (0·40 ± 0·005) m Distance, d : 1·31 m 1·40 m 1·38 m 1·41 m 1·35 m (a) (i) Calculate the mean distance d travelled by the car. Space for working and answer (ii) Calculate the approximate random uncertainty in this value. Space for working and answer 1 2 Page 09 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (continued) (b) Determine which of the quantities; mass m, height h or mean distance d, has the largest percentage uncertainty. You must justify your answer by calculation. Space for working and answer (c) (i) Calculate the potential energy of the toy car at height h. An uncertainty in this value is not required. Space for working and answer [Turn over 4 3 Page 10 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (c) (continued) (ii) Calculate the average force of friction acting between the toy car and carpet, as the car comes to rest. An uncertainty in this value is not required. Space for working and answer (iii) State one assumption you have made in (c) (ii). 3 1 Page 11 [Turn over for next question do not write on this page Page 12 MArKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. The following apparatus is set up to investigate the law of conservation of linear momentum. computer m s−1 v1 v2 m s−1 light gate 1 light gate 2 vehicle Y vehicle X frictionless track In one experiment, vehicle X is travelling to the right along the track and vehicle Y is travelling to the left along the track. The vehicles collide and stick together. The computer displays the speeds of each vehicle before the collision. The following data are recorded: Mass of vehicle X = 0·85 kg Mass of vehicle Y = 0·25 kg Speed of vehicle X before the collision = 0·55 m s−1 Speed of vehicle Y before the collision = 0·30 m s−1 (a) State the law of conservation of linear momentum. (b) Calculate the velocity of the vehicles immediately after the collision. Space for working and answer 1 3 Page 13 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. (continued) (c) Show by calculation that the collision is inelastic. Space for working and answer [Turn over 4 Page 14 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. Two physics students are in an airport building on their way to visit CERN. (a) The first student steps onto a moving walkway, which is travelling at 0·83 m s−1 relative to the building. This student walks along the walkway at a speed of 1·20 m s−1 relative to the walkway. The second student walks alongside the walkway at a speed of 1·80 m s−1 relative to the building. moving walkway direction of travel walkway Determine the speed of the first student relative to the second student. Space for working and answer 2 Page 15 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. (continued) (b) On the plane, the students discuss the possibility of travelling at relativistic speeds. (i) The students consider the plane travelling at 0·8c relative to a stationary observer. The plane emits a beam of light towards the observer. State the speed of the emitted light as measured by the observer. Justify your answer. (ii) According to the manufacturer, the length of the plane is 71 m. Calculate the length of the plane travelling at 0·8c as measured by the stationary observer. Space for working and answer (iii) One of the students states that the clocks on board the plane will run slower when the plane is travelling at relativistic speeds. Explain whether or not this statement is correct. [Turn over 2 3 1

Page 16 5. (a) A student is using an elastic band to model the expansion of the Universe. knot clamp elastic band V W X Y One end of the band is fixed in a clamp stand at V. Knots are tied in the band to represent galaxies. The knots are at regular intervals of 0·10 m, at points W, X and Y as shown. 0·00 0·05 0·10 0·15 0·20 0·25 0·30 0·35 0·40 V W X Y distance (m) The other end of the elastic band is pulled slowly for 2·5 seconds, so that the band stretches. The knots are now in the positions shown below. 0·00 0·05 0·10 0·15 0·20 0·25 0·30 0·35 0·40 V W X Y distance (m) Page 17 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (a) (continued) (i) Complete the table to show the average speeds of the knots X and Y. Knot Average speed (m s−1) W 0·008 X Y Space for working (ii) Explain why this model is a good simulation of the expansion of the Universe. [Turn over 2 1 Page 18 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (continued) (b) When viewed from the Earth, the continuous emission spectrum from the Sun has a number of dark lines. One of these lines is at a wavelength of 656 nm. 656 nm In the spectrum of light from a distant galaxy, the corresponding dark line is observed at 667 nm. Calculate the redshift of the light from the distant galaxy. Space for working and answer 3 Page 19 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. A website states “Atoms are like tiny solar systems with electrons orbiting a nucleus like the planets orbit the Sun”. Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this statement. [Turn over 3 Page 20 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. An experiment is set up to investigate the behaviour of electrons in electric fields. electron beam anode cathode parallel metal plates S 250 V 2·0 kV – – + + (a) Electrons are accelerated from rest between the cathode and the anode by a potential difference of 2·0 kV. Calculate the kinetic energy gained by each electron as it reaches the anode. Space for working and answer (b) The electrons then pass between the two parallel metal plates. The electron beam current is 8·0 mA. Determine the number of electrons passing between the metal plates in one minute. Space for working and answer 3 4 Page 21 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (c) The switch S is now closed. The potential difference between the metal plates is 250 V. The path of the electron beam between the metal plates is shown. path of electron beam 0 V + 250 V Complete the diagram to show the electric field pattern between the two metal plates. (An additional diagram, if required, can be found on Page 38.) [Turn over 1 Page 22 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. The diagram shows part of an experimental fusion reactor. plasma magnets The following statement represents a reaction that takes place inside the reactor. + → + 2 3 4 1 1 1 2 0 H H He n The masses of the particles involved in the reaction are shown in the table. Particle Mass (kg) 2 1 H 3·3436 × 10−27 3 1 H 5·0083 × 10−27 4 2 He 6·6465 × 10−27 1 0 n 1·6749 × 10−27 (a) Explain why energy is released in this reaction. (b) Calculate the energy released in this reaction. Space for working and answer 1 4 Page 23 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. (continued) (c) Magnetic fields are used to contain the plasma inside the fusion reactor. Explain why it is necessary to use a magnetic field to contain the plasma. (d) The plasma consists of charged particles. A positively charged particle enters a region of the magnetic field as shown. positively charged particle region of magnetic field into page Determine the direction of the force exerted by the magnetic field on the positively charged particle as it enters the field. [Turn over 1 1 Page 24 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. A student carries out an experiment to measure the wavelength of microwave radiation. Microwaves pass through two gaps between metal plates as shown. microwave source metal plates detector 282 mm 204 mm meter second order maximum central maximum B A As the detector is moved from A to B, a series of maxima and minima are detected. (a) The microwaves passing through the gaps are coherent. State what is meant by the term coherent. (b) Explain, in terms of waves, how a maximum is produced. (c) The measurements of the distance from each gap to the second order maximum are shown in the diagram above. Calculate the wavelength of the microwaves. Space for working and answer 1 1 3 Page 25 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. (continued) (d) The distance separating the two gaps is now increased. State what happens to the path difference to the second order maximum. Justify your answer. [Turn over 2 Page 26 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. Retroflective materials reflect light to enhance the visibility of clothing. One type of retroflective material is made from small glass spheres partially embedded in a silver-coloured surface that reflects light. A ray of monochromatic light follows the path shown as it enters one of the glass spheres. normal ray of light air normal silver-coloured surface glass sphere 36° 18° 18° P (a) Calculate the refractive index of the glass for this light. Space for working and answer 3 Page 27 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. (continued) (b) Calculate the critical angle for this light in the glass. Space for working and answer (c) The light is reflected at point P. Complete the diagram below to show the path of the ray as it passes through the sphere and emerges into the air. normal ray of light air normal silver-coloured surface glass sphere 36° 18° 18° P (An additional diagram, if required, can be found on Page 38.) [Turn over 3 1 Page 28 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. A student is describing how the following circuit works. The student states: “The electricity comes out of the battery with energy and flows through the resistor using up some of the energy, it then goes through the LED and the rest of the energy is changed into light waves.” Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this statement. 3 Page 29 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. A technician sets up a circuit as shown, using a car battery and two identical lamps. The battery has an e.m.f. of 12·8 V and an internal resistance of 0·10 Ω. A V S 12·8 V 0·10 Ω 4·8 Ω (a) Switch S is open. The reading on the ammeter is 1·80 A. (i) Determine the reading on the voltmeter. Space for working and answer (ii) Switch S is now closed. State the effect this has on the reading on the voltmeter. Justify your answer. 4 3 [Turn over Page 30 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (continued) (b) Some cars use LEDs in place of filament lamps. An LED is made from semiconductor material that has been doped with impurities to create a p-n junction. The diagram represents the band structure of an LED. conduction band valence band band gap p-type n-type (i) A voltage is applied across an LED so that it is forward biased and emits light. Using band theory, explain how the LED emits light. 3 Page 31 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (b) (continued) (ii) The energy gap between the valence band and conduction band is known as the band gap. The band gap for the LED is 3·03 × 10−19 J (A) Calculate the wavelength of the light emitted by the LED. Space for working and answer (B) Determine the colour of the light emitted by the LED. [Turn over 4 1 Page 32 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. A technician sets up a circuit as shown. 150 mF 56 Ω 19 Ω 12 V + − P Q The power supply has negligible internal resistance. (a) The capacitor is initially uncharged. The switch is moved to position P and the capacitor charges. (i) State the potential difference across the capacitor when it is fully charged. (ii) Calculate the maximum energy stored by the capacitor. Space for working and answer 1 3 Page 33 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. (continued) (b) The switch is now moved back to position Q. Determine the maximum discharge current in the circuit. Space for working and answer (c) The technician replaces the 150 mF capacitor with a capacitor of capacitance 47 mF. The switch is moved to position P and the capacitor is fully charged. The switch is now moved to position Q. State the effect that this change has on the time the lamp stays lit. You must justify your answer. [Turn over for next question 3 2 Page 34 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. A student investigates the factors affecting the frequency of sound produced by a vibrating guitar string. The guitar string is stretched over two supports and is made to vibrate as shown. support not to scale guitar string pulley masses The frequency f of the sound produced by the vibrating string is given by the relationship 1 2 T f L μ = where T is the tension in the string L is the distance between the supports μ is the mass per unit length of the string. (a) The tension in the string is 49·0 N and the mass per unit length of the string is 4·00 × 10−4 kg m−1. The distance between the supports is 0·550 m. Calculate the frequency f of the sound produced. Space for working and answer 2 Page 35 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. (continued) (b) The guitar string in part (a) is replaced by a different guitar string. A student varies the tension T and measures the frequency f of the sound produced by the new guitar string. The student records the following information. T (N) T (N½) f (Hz) 10 3·2 162 15 3·9 190 20 4·5 220 25 5·0 254 30 5·5 273 (i) Using the square-ruled paper on Page 36, draw a graph of f against T (ii) Use your graph to determine the frequency of the sound produced when the tension in the guitar string is 22 N. [END OF QUESTION PAPER] 3 1 Page 36 Page 37 Page 38 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Question 1 (d) displacement (m) time (s) sh 0 Question 7 (c) path of electron beam 0 V + 250 V Question 10 (c) normal ray of light air normal silver-coloured surface glass sphere 36° 18° 18° P Page 39 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Page 40 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Section 2 Question 10 – Image of Reflective Safety Jacket, taken from http://www.tradeget. com/listing/sri-balaji-associates/product-services-detail-62668/18652/1/1). SQA has made every effort to trace the owners of copyright materials reproduced in this question paper, and seek permissions. We will be happy to incorporate any missing acknowledgements. Please contact Janine.Anderson@sqa.org.uk. © National Qualications 2016 H X757/76/11 Physics Relationships Sheet TUESDAY, 24 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB Page 02 d vt = W = QV 2 peak rms V = V s vt = 2 E = mc 2 peak rms I = I v u at = + E hf = Q It = 2 1 2 s ut at = + 0 k E = hf hf − V = IR 2 2 2 v u as = + 2 1 E E hf − = 2 2 V P = IV = I R = R ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + 1 T f = 1 2 T R = R R . . . . + + W = mg F ma = v f = λ 1 2 1 1 1 T = . . . . R R R + + W E Fd = sin d = m θ λ E = V Ir + p E mgh = 1 2 sin sin n = θ θ E P t = 1 1 1 2 2 2 sin sin v = = v θ λ θ λ 1 1 2 2 V R = V R p = mv 1 sin c = n θ Q C = V Ft mv mu = − 1 2 2 m m F r = G 2 k I d = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV = CV = C = ( ) ' 1 t t vc − 2 = P I = A ( ) 2 ' 1 v l l c − = 2 1 2 k E = mv observed rest rest z − = λ λ λ v z c = 0 v H d = − max. min. value value random uncertainty = number of values 1 2   + =     path difference = m m m λ λ or where 0, 1, 2 . . . Relationships required for Physics Higher 1 1 1 2 s R V = V R R ⎛ ⎞ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ = Page 03 Additional Relationships Circle circumference = 2πr area = πr2 Sphere area = 4πr2 volume = 4 3¯πr3 Trigonometry sin ϴ = opposite hypotenuse cos ϴ = adjacent hypotenuse tan ϴ = opposite adjacent sin2 ϴ + cos2 ϴ = 1 Page 04 Electron Arrangements of Elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition Elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides

Page 03 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. The graph shows how the velocity of an object varies with time. velocity (m s−1) time (s) 10 8 5 2 0 0 The acceleration of the object is A 0·83 m s−2 B 1·2 m s−2 C 2·5 m s−2 D 5·0 m s−2 E 6·0 m s−2. 2. A block is resting on a horizontal surface. A force of 24 N is now applied as shown and the block slides along the surface. 24 N 60° The mass of the block is 20 kg. The acceleration of the block is 0·20 m s−2. The force of friction acting on the block is A 4·0 N B 8·0 N C 12 N D 16 N E 25 N. [Turn over

Page 04 3. The graph shows how the vertical speed of a skydiver varies with time. vertical speed P Q R S 0 time A student uses information from the graph to make the following statements. I The acceleration of the skydiver is greatest between P and Q. II The air resistance acting on the skydiver between Q and R is less than the weight of the skydiver. III The forces acting on the skydiver are balanced between R and S. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I , II and III 4. A spacecraft is travelling at a constant speed of 2·75 × 108 m s−1 relative to a planet. A technician on the spacecraft measures the length of the spacecraft as 125 m. An observer on the planet measures the length of the spacecraft as A 36 m B 50 m C 124 m D 314 m E 433 m.

Page 05 5. A galaxy has a recessional velocity of 0·30c. Hubble’s Law predicts that the distance between Earth and this galaxy is A 1·3 × 1017 m B 3·9 × 1025 m C 1·3 × 1026 m D 1·4 × 1041 m E 4·5 × 1042 m. 6. Measurements of the expansion rate of the Universe lead to the conclusion that the rate of expansion is increasing. Present theory proposes that this is due to A redshift B dark matter C dark energy D the gravitational force E cosmic microwave background radiation. 7. A student makes the following statements about the radiation emitted by stellar objects. I Stellar objects emit radiation over a wide range of frequencies. II The peak wavelength of radiation is longer for hotter objects than for cooler objects. III At all frequencies, hotter objects emit more radiation per unit surface area per unit time than cooler objects. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B III only C I and II only D I and III only E I, II and III [Turn over

Page 06 8. The following statement represents a nuclear reaction. Lr Z He 256 4 103 2 → + Nucleus Z is A Md 252 101 B No 252 101 C Md 256 101 D Db 260 105 E Lr 252 103 . 9. Radiation is incident on a clean zinc plate causing photoelectrons to be emitted. The source of radiation is replaced with one emitting radiation of a higher frequency. The irradiance of the radiation incident on the plate remains unchanged. Which row in the table shows the effect of this change on the maximum kinetic energy of a photoelectron and the number of photoelectrons emitted per second? Maximum kinetic energy of a photoelectron Number of photoelectrons emitted per second A no change no change B no change increases C increases no change D increases decreases E decreases increases

Page 07 10. Ultraviolet radiation of frequency 7·70 × 1014 Hz is incident on the surface of a metal. Photoelectrons are emitted from the surface of the metal. The maximum kinetic energy of an emitted photoelectron is 2·67 × 10−19 J. The work function of the metal is A 1·07 × 10−19 J B 2·44 × 10−19 J C 2·67 × 10−19 J D 5·11 × 10−19 J E 7·78 × 10−19 J. 11. A student makes the following statements about waves from coherent sources. I Waves from coherent sources have the same velocity. II Waves from coherent sources have the same wavelength. III Waves from coherent sources have a constant phase relationship. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D I and III only E I, II and III [Turn over

Page 08 12. A ray of red light passes from a liquid to a transparent solid. The solid and the liquid have the same refractive index for this light. Which row in the table shows what happens to the speed and wavelength of the light as it passes from the liquid into the solid? Speed Wavelength A decreases decreases B decreases increases C no change increases D increases no change E no change no change 13. A ray of blue light passes from air into a transparent block as shown. 60º 30º 50º 40º air block The speed of this light in the block is A 1·80 × 108 m s−1 B 1·96 × 108 m s−1 C 2·00 × 108 m s−1 D 2·23 × 108 m s−1 E 2·65 × 108 m s−1.

Page 09 14. A student carries out an experiment to investigate how irradiance varies with distance. A small lamp is placed at a distance d away from a light meter. The irradiance I at this distance is displayed on the meter. This measurement is repeated for a range of different distances. The student uses these results to produce the graph shown. I 0 2 1 d The graph indicates that there is a systematic uncertainty in this experiment. Which of the following would be most likely to reduce the systematic uncertainty in this experiment? A Repeating the readings and calculating mean values. B Replacing the small lamp with a larger lamp. C Decreasing the brightness of the lamp. D Repeating the experiment in a darkened room. E Increasing the range of distances. 15. A point source of light is 8·00 m away from a surface. The irradiance, due to the point source, at the surface is 50·0 mW m−2. The point source is now moved to a distance of 12·0 m from the surface. The irradiance, due to the point source, at the surface is now A 22·2 mW m−2 B 26·0 mW m−2 C 33·3 mW m−2 D 75·0 mW m−2 E 267 mW m−2. [Turn over

Page 10 16. The output from an a.c. power supply is connected to an oscilloscope. The trace seen on the oscilloscope screen is shown. div div The Y-gain setting on the oscilloscope is 1·0 V/div. The r.m.s. voltage of the power supply is A 2·1 V B 3·0 V C 4·0 V D 4·2 V E 6·0 V. 17. A 20 µF capacitor is connected to a 12 V d.c. supply. The maximum charge stored on the capacitor is A 1·4 × 10−3 C B 2·4 × 10−4 C C 1·4 × 10−4 C D 1·7 × 10−6 C E 6·0 × 10−7 C.

Page 11 18. A circuit containing a capacitor is set up as shown. 6∙0 V 480 Ω 120 Ω 30 μF The supply has negligible internal resistance. The maximum energy stored in the capacitor is A 5·4 × 10−4 J B 3·5 × 10−4 J C 1·4 × 10−4 J D 3·4 × 10−5 J E 2·2 × 10−5 J. 19. A student makes the following statements about conductors, insulators and semiconductors. I In conductors, the conduction band is completely filled with electrons. II In insulators, the gap between the valence band and the conduction band is large. III In semiconductors, increasing the temperature increases the conductivity. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E II and III only [Turn over for next question

Page 12 20. Astronomers use the following relationship to determine the distance, d, to a star. 2 4 L F πd = For a particular star the following measurements are recorded: apparent brightness, F = 4·4 × 10−10 W m−2 luminosity, L = 6·1 × 1030 W Based on this information, the distance to this star is A 3·3 × 1019 m B 1·5 × 1021 m C 3·7 × 1036 m D 1·1 × 1039 m E 3·9 × 1039 m. [END OF SECTION 1. NOW ATTEMPT THE QUESTIONS IN SECTION 2 OF YOUR QUESTION AND ANSWER BOOKLET] H FOR OFFICIAL USE Fill in these boxes and read what is printed below. Number of seat Town © Mark Full name of centre Forename(s) Surname Scottish candidate number Date of birth Year Day Month National Qualications 2017 Total marks — 130 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions. Instructions for the completion of Section 1 are given on Page 02. SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions. Reference may be made to the Data Sheet on Page 02 of the question paper X757/76/02 and to the Relationship Sheet X757/76/11. Care should be taken to give an appropriate number of significant figures in the final answers to calculations. Write your answers clearly in the spaces provided in this booklet. Additional space for answers and rough work is provided at the end of this booklet. If you use this space you must clearly identify the question number you are attempting. Any rough work must be written in this booklet. You should score through your rough work when you have written your final copy. Use blue or black ink. Before leaving the examination room you must give this booklet to the Invigilator; if you do not, you may lose all the marks for this paper. X757/76/01 WEDNESDAY, 17 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB Physics Section 1 — Answer Grid and Section 2 Page 02 The questions for Section 1 are contained in the question paper X757/76/02. Read these and record your answers on the answer grid on Page 03 opposite. Use blue or black ink. Do NOT use gel pens or pencil. 1. The answer to each question is either A, B, C, D or E. Decide what your answer is, then fill in the appropriate bubble (see sample question below). 2. There is only one correct answer to each question. 3. Any rough work must be written in the additional space for answers and rough work at the end of this booklet. Sample Question The energy unit measured by the electricity meter in your home is the: A ampere B kilowatt-hour C watt D coulomb E volt. The correct answer is B — kilowatt-hour. The answer B bubble has been clearly filled in (see below). A B C D E Changing an answer If you decide to change your answer, cancel your first answer by putting a cross through it (see below) and fill in the answer you want. The answer below has been changed to D. A B C D E If you then decide to change back to an answer you have already scored out, put a tick (3) to the right of the answer you want, as shown below: A B C D E or A B C D E SECTION 1 — 20 marks Page 03 A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SECTION 1 — Answer Grid [Turn over Page 04 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 05 [Turn over for SECTION 2 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 06 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. A student is on a stationary train. The train now accelerates along a straight level track. The student uses an app on a phone to measure the acceleration of the train. (a) The train accelerates uniformly at 0·32 m s−2 for 25 seconds. (i) State what is meant by an acceleration of 0·32 m s−2. (ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the train in the 25 seconds. Space for working and answer 1 3 Page 07 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (continued) (b) Later in the journey, the train is travelling at a constant speed as it approaches a bridge. A horn on the train emits sound of frequency 270 Hz. The frequency of the sound heard by a person standing on the bridge is 290 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m s−1. (i) Calculate the speed of the train. Space for working and answer (ii) The train continues to sound its horn as it passes under the bridge. Explain why the frequency of the sound heard by the person standing on the bridge decreases as the train passes under the bridge and then moves away. You may wish to use a diagram. 3 1 [Turn over Page 08 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. A white snooker ball and a black snooker ball travel towards each other in a straight line. The white ball and the black ball each have a mass of 0·180 kg. Just before the balls collide head-on, the white ball is travelling at 2·60 m s−1 to the right and the black ball is travelling at 1·80 m s−1 to the left. 2∙60 m s−1 1∙80 m s−1 After the collision, the black ball rebounds with a velocity of 2·38 m s−1 to the right. (a) (i) Determine the velocity of the white ball immediately after the collision. Space for working and answer (ii) The collision between the balls is inelastic. State what is meant by an inelastic collision. 3 1 Page 09 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (continued) (b) A student carries out an experiment to measure the average force exerted by a cue on a ball. push switch cue timer ball motion sensor computer The cue hits the stationary ball. The timer records the time the cue is in contact with the ball. The computer displays the speed of the ball. The results are shown. Time of contact between the cue and the ball = (0·040 ± 0·001) s Speed of the ball immediately after contact = (0·84 ± 0·01) m s−1 Mass of the ball = (0·180 ± 0·001) kg (i) Calculate the average force exerted on the ball by the cue. An uncertainty in this value is not required. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the percentage uncertainty in the value for the average force on the ball. Space for working and answer 3 2 [Turn over Page 10 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. A ball is thrown vertically upwards. The ball is above the ground when released. not to scale ground 5∙6 m s−1 The graph shows how the vertical velocity of the ball varies with time from the instant it is released until just before it hits the ground. vertical velocity (m s−1) 5∙6 0∙0 −7∙7 time (s) The effects of air resistance can be ignored. (a) (i) Calculate the time taken for the ball to reach its maximum height. Space for working and answer 3 Page 11 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. (a) (continued) (ii) Calculate the distance the ball falls from its maximum height to the ground. Space for working and answer (b) The ball is now thrown vertically upwards from the same height with a greater initial vertical velocity. Add a line to the graph below to show how the vertical velocity of the ball varies with time from the instant it is released until just before it hits the ground. The effects of air resistance can be ignored. Additional numerical values on the axes are not required. vertical velocity (m s−1) 5∙6 0∙0 −7∙7 time (s) (An additional graph, if required, can be found on Page 39.) 3 3 [Turn over Page 12 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. Some motorways have variable speed limits, with overhead information boards displaying the maximum speed allowed. This system is designed to keep the traffic flowing and to avoid congestion. In this system, the flow of traffic is observed and the maximum speed to be displayed is determined using speed = frequency × wavelength Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this system for determining the maximum speed to be displayed. 3 Page 13 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. (continued) [Turn over Page 14 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. Planets outside our solar system are called exoplanets. An exoplanet of mass 5·69 × 1027 kg orbits a star of mass 3·83 × 1030 kg. 3∙14 × 1011 m exoplanet star not to scale (a) (i) Compare the mass of the star with the mass of the exoplanet in terms of orders of magnitude. Space for working and answer (ii) The distance between the exoplanet and the star is 3·14 × 1011 m. Calculate the gravitational force between the star and the exoplanet. Space for working and answer 2 3 Page 15 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (continued) (b) The gravitational force between the star and the exoplanet causes the star to follow a circular path as the exoplanet orbits the star. Small differences in the wavelength of the light from the star are observed on Earth. Light from the star is redshifted when the star moves away from the Earth and blueshifted when the star moves towards the Earth. not to scale exoplanet exoplanet star star redshifted blueshifted light from star light from star to Earth to Earth (i) Calculate the redshift of light from the star observed on Earth when the star is moving away from the Earth at 6·60 × 103 m s−1. Space for working and answer (ii) For an exoplanet of greater mass at the same distance from the star, suggest whether the radius of the circular path followed by the star would be greater than, less than, or the same as that for an exoplanet of smaller mass. 3 1 [Turn over Page 16 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. The visible spectrum of light emitted by a star is observed to contain a number of dark lines. The dark lines occur because certain wavelengths of light are absorbed when light passes through atoms in the star’s outer atmosphere. The diagram shows some of the energy levels for a hydrogen atom. E3 E2 E1 E0 −1∙36 × 10−19 J −2∙42 × 10−19 J −5∙42 × 10−19 J −21∙8 × 10−19 J (a) For the energy levels shown in the diagram, identify the electron transition that would lead to the absorption of a photon with the highest frequency. (b) An electron makes the transition from energy level E1 to E3. Determine the frequency of the photon absorbed. Space for working and answer 1 3 Page 17 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 18 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. The following diagram gives information on the Standard Model of fundamental particles. matter atom electron nucleus proton neutron quarks (a) Explain why the proton and the neutron are not fundamental particles. (b) An extract from a data book contains the following information about three types of sigma (Σ) particles. Sigma particles are made up of three quarks. Particle Symbol Quark Content Charge Mean lifetime (s) sigma plus Σ+ up up strange +1e 8·0 × 10−11 neutral sigma Σ0 up down strange 0 7·4 × 10−20 sigma minus Σ− down down strange −1e 1·5 × 10−10 (i) A student makes the following statement. All baryons are hadrons, but not all hadrons are baryons. Explain why this statement is correct. (ii) The charge on an up quark is 2 3 e + . Determine the charge on a strange quark. Space for working and answer 1 2 1 Page 19 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (c) (i) State the name of the force that holds the quarks together in the sigma (Σ) particle. (ii) State the name of the boson associated with this force. (d) Sigma minus (Σ−) particles have a mean lifetime of 1·5 × 10−10 s in their frame of reference. Σ− are produced in a particle accelerator and travel at a speed of 0·9c relative to a stationary observer. Calculate the mean lifetime of the Σ− particle as measured by this observer. Space for working and answer 1 1 3 [Turn over Page 20 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. X-ray machines are used in hospitals. An X-ray machine contains a linear accelerator that is used to accelerate electrons towards a metal target. The linear accelerator consists of hollow metal tubes placed in a vacuum. 2∙50 kV alternating supply P Q metal tube electron beam Electrons are accelerated across the gaps between the tubes by an alternating supply. (a) (i) Calculate the work done on an electron as it accelerates from P to Q. Space for working and answer (ii) Explain why an alternating supply is used in the linear accelerator. 3 1 Page 21 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. (continued) (b) The electron beam is then passed into a “slalom magnet” beam guide. The function of the beam guide is to direct the electrons towards a metal target. Inside the beam guides R and S, two different magnetic fields act on the electrons. Electrons strike the metal target to produce high energy photons of radiation. electron beam metal target S R (i) Determine the direction of the magnetic field inside beam guide R. (ii) State two differences between the magnetic fields inside beam guides R and S. (c) Calculate the minimum speed of an electron that will produce a photon of energy 4·16 × 10−17 J. Space for working and answer 1 2 3 [Turn over Page 22 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. A diagram from a 'How Things Work' website contains information about a nuclear fusion reaction. deuterium proton neutron helium-4 energy proton helium-3 Reaction of helium-3 with deuterium (a) State what is meant by the term nuclear fusion. 1 Page 23 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. (continued) (b) The following statement represents this fusion reaction. 3 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 He H He p + → + The mass of the particles involved in the reaction are shown in the table. Particle Mass (kg) 3 2He 5·008 × 10−27 2 1H 3·344 × 10−27 4 2He 6·646 × 10−27 1 1p 1·673 × 10−27 (i) Explain why energy is released in this reaction. (ii) Determine the energy released in this reaction. Space for working and answer 1 4 [Turn over Page 24 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. An experiment is carried out to determine the wavelength of light from a laser. not to scale laser grating screen first order maximum central maximum θ (a) Explain, in terms of waves, how a maximum is formed. (b) The experiment is carried out with four gratings. The separation of the slits d is different for each grating. The angle between the central maximum and the first order maximum θ, produced by each grating, is measured. The results are used to produce a graph of sinθ against 1 d . 0∙60 0∙50 0∙40 0∙30 0∙20 0∙10 0∙00 0∙00 0∙10 0∙20 0∙30 0∙40 0∙50 0∙60 0∙70 0∙80 1∙00 0∙90 1∙10 sinθ ( ) 6 1 1 10 m d − × 1 Page 25 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. (b) (continued) (i) Determine the wavelength of the light from the laser used in this experiment. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the angle θ produced when a grating with a spacing d of 2·0 × 10−6 m is used with this laser. Space for working and answer (c) Suggest two improvements that could be made to the experiment to improve reliability. 3 3 2 [Turn over Page 26 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. The use of analogies from everyday life can help better understanding of physics concepts. A car moving from a smooth surface to a rough surface, eg from a road to sand, can be used as an analogy for the refraction of light. smooth road sand Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this analogy. 3 Page 27 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 28 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. A lamp is connected to a battery containing two cells as shown. V A 1∙5 V 2∙7 Ω 2∙7 Ω 1∙5 V The e.m.f. of each cell is 1·5 V and the internal resistance of each cell is 2·7 Ω. The reading on the ammeter is 64 mA. (a) State what is meant by an e.m.f. of 1·5 V. (b) (i) Show that the lost volts in the battery is 0·35 V. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the reading on the voltmeter. Space for working and answer (iii) Calculate the power dissipated by the lamp. Space for working and answer 1 2 1 3 Page 29 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (continued) (c) In a different circuit, an LED is connected to a battery containing four cells. 1∙5 V 1∙5 V 1∙5 V 1∙5 V 2∙7 Ω 2∙7 Ω 2∙7 Ω 2∙7 Ω R A The potential difference across the LED is 3·6 V when the current is 26 mA. Determine the resistance of resistor R. Space for working and answer 4 [Turn over Page 30 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 31 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. An uncharged 220 μF capacitor is connected in a circuit as shown. 12 V S1 S2 6800 Ω 6800 Ω 220 μF The 12 V battery has negligible internal resistance. (a) Switch S1 is closed and the capacitor charges in a time of 7·5 s. Calculate the initial charging current. Space for working and answer (b) Switch S1 is opened. The capacitor is discharged. Switch S2 is now closed and then switch S1 is closed. Explain why the time for the capacitor to fully charge is less than in part (a). 3 2 [Turn over Page 32 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. Solar cells are made by joining n-type and p-type semiconductor materials. A layer is formed at the junction between the materials. (a) A potential difference is produced when photons enter the layer between the p-type and n-type materials. State the name of this effect. (b) A student carries out an experiment using a solar cell connected to a variable resistor R as shown. solar cell R V A A lamp is placed above the solar cell and switched on. The variable resistor is altered and readings of current and voltage are taken. These readings are used to produce the following graph. current (mA) voltage (V) 0∙0 40 30 20 10 0 0∙5 1∙0 1∙5 2∙0 2∙5 3∙0 1 Page 33 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. (b) (continued) (i) Solar cells have a maximum power output for a particular irradiance of light. In this experiment, the maximum power output occurs when the voltage is 2·1 V. Use information from the graph to estimate a value for the maximum power output from the solar cell. Space for working and answer (ii) The lamp is now moved closer to the solar cell. Explain, in terms of photons, why the maximum output power from the solar cell increases. 3 1 [Turn over for next question Page 34 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. A wire of length L and cross-sectional area A is shown. wire L A The resistance R of the wire is given by the relationship ρL R A = where ρ is the resistivity of the wire in Ω m. (a) The resistivity of aluminium is 2·8 × 10−8 Ω m. Calculate the resistance of an aluminium wire of length 0·82 m and cross-sectional area 4·0 × 10−6 m2. Space for working and answer 2 Page 35 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. (continued) (b) A student carries out an investigation to determine the resistivity of a cylindrical metal wire of cross-sectional area 4·52 × 10−6 m2. 4∙52 × 10−6 m2 The student varies the length L of the wire and measures the corresponding resistance R of the wire. The results are shown in the table. Length of wire L (m) Resistance of wire R (×10−3 Ω) 1·5 5·6 2·0 7·5 2·5 9·4 3·0 11·2 3·5 13·2 (i) Using the square-ruled paper on Page 36, draw a graph of R against L. (ii) Calculate the gradient of your graph. Space for working and answer (iii) Determine the resistivity of the metal wire. Space for working and answer [END OF QUESTION PAPER] 3 2 3 Page 36 Page 37 Page 38 Page 39 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional graph for use with Question 3 (b) vertical velocity (m s−1) 5∙6 0∙0 −7∙7 time (s) Page 40 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Page 41 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Page 42 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 43 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Page 44 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Acknowledgement of Copyright Question 1 KieferPix/shutterstock.com Question 4 Editorial Credit: Flik47/shutterstock.com © National Qualications 2017 H X757/76/11 Physics Relationships Sheet WEDNESDAY, 17 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB Page 02 d vt = s vt = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + W mg = F ma = ( ) 2 1 t t vc ′ = − ( ) 2 1 v l l c ′ = − o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ observed rest rest λ λ z λ − = v z c = 0 v H d = 2 E mc = E hf = 0 k E hf hf = − 2 1 E E hf − = 1 T f = v fλ = sin d θ mλ = sin sin 1 2 θ n θ = sin sin 1 1 1 2 2 2 θ λ v θ λ v = = sin 1 cθ n = 2 k I d = P I A = , , ... 1 2 path difference or where 0 1 2 mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = max. value min. value random uncertainty number of values − = 2 peak rms V V = 2 peak rms I I = Q It = V IR = 2 2 V P IV I R R = = = .... 1 2 T R R R = + + .... 1 2 1 1 1 T R R R = + + E V Ir = + 1 1 1 2 s R V V R R ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ 1 1 2 2 V R V R = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV CV C = = = Q C V = W QV = W E Fd = p E mgh = 2 1 2 k E mv = E P t = p mv = Ft mv mu = − 1 2 2 m m F G r = Relationships required for Physics Higher Page 03 Additional Relationships Circle Sphere Trigonometry circumference 2πr = 2 area πr = 2 area 4πr = 3 4 3 volume πr = sin opposite hypotenuse θ = cos adjacent hypotenuse θ = tan opposite adjacent θ = sin cos 2 2 1 θ θ + = Page 04 Electron Arrangements of Elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition Elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides

4 11141.02 Question 1 • Gas jar with diameter 4–6cm, capacity at least 200ml, mass less than 300g • Half metre rule • Vernier calliper • Electronic balance capable of reading up to 500 g to nearest 1g or 0.1g • 250ml beaker • 150ml salt water solution (approx. 1.1g cm–3) • 250 ml graduated cylinder • Insulating tape Question 2 • Thermistor EPCOS B57164K471J or similar (KED471). RS 191-2229 • 1.5 V D cell • Digital milliammeter 0–20 mA to 0.01 mA • Digital voltmeter 0–20 V to 0.01 V • Connecting leads with 5mm plugs at each end × 6 • 250ml beaker • Water at room temperature • Crushed ice • Retort stand & clamp • Switch • Method of clamping the thermistor into retort stand, e.g. component holder with crocodile clips. • Dessert spoon/soup spoon • Thermometer with range -10°C to 110°C

5 11141.02 Question 3 • 20cm convex lens and holder • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10 ±1mm) and crosswires as used in 2011 A2 3 shown in Fig 3.1 • Screen – plain white paper • Metre rule • 30cm rule Fig. 3.1 Question 4 • Pendulum bob, string and split cork • Retort stand, clamp and boss • Stopclock to 0.01s • Metre rule 11141.03 ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY (AS) General Certificate of Education 2018 CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS Physics Assessment Unit AS 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [SPH31] THURSDAY 3 MAY 2 11141.03 1 Confidential Instructions These instructions will give detailed guidance on setting up and testing the apparatus and materials to be used. Again, information contained within the Confidential Instructions must not be relayed to candidates under any circumstances. If at this point, centres find that the testing process produces results different to those specified in the Confidential Instructions, they must contact the CCEA Science Subject Officer (ggray@ccea.org.uk) immediately. 2 Final Apparatus Testing The practical assessment question paper will be made available to the Head of Physics two working days before the timetabled starting time so that teachers and technicians can carry out a final test on the experiments. If on checking the apparatus gives unexpected results, the CCEA Physics Subject Officer should be contacted immediately (ggray@ccea.org.uk). If the problem cannot be resolved, then the centre must e-mail the CCEA Physics Subject Officer stating the centre name and number, the specific nature of the problem and the range of anomalous results produced. CCEA will respond by acknowledging receipt of the e-mail. If you do not receive a response within 24 hours, please contact the CCEA Physics Subject Officer by telephone (028 90261200 Ext 2270) to confirm that CCEA has received your e-mail. 3 Practical Assessment AS 3A The AS 3A Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills comprised of 4 short experimental tests. The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. Some of this time will be set aside for supervisors to re-set the apparatus ready for the next candidates. The assessment should be run as a circus of experiments with candidates moving to the next experiment at the designated time. The assessment should be timed as follows: Questions Time Q1 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q2 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q3 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q4 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes End of test write-up 4 minutes At the end of each 12 minute period, candidates must stop using the apparatus. During each 2 minute changeover period candidates may write up anything they have not completed however they will not have access to the apparatus. At the end of the test a 4 minute period is provided for candidates to complete their answer to any question, however they will not have access to the apparatus. 3 11141.03 4 After the Practical Assessments When the individual exam sessions have finished, please return the AS 3A practical scripts together with the corresponding advice notes to the examinations officer (EO). We will collect these by the day after the examination. If we don’t, please contact us immediately to arrange another time for collection. Where the centre finds that a candidate may have been disadvantaged because the apparatus did not function as intended, the supervising teachers should make a report to the EO. The EO will forward the confidential report on the issue and the candidates affected to the centre support section at CCEA for special consideration. Candidates should be identified by their examination number. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Tests from the suppliers as soon as possible.

4 11141.03 Question 1 Requirements • Gas jar with diameter 4–6 cm, capacity at least 200 ml, mass less than 300 g • Half metre rule • Vernier callipers • Electronic balance capable of reading up to 500 g to nearest 1 g or 0.1 g • 250 ml beaker • 150 ml salt water solution (approx. 1.1 g cm–3) • 250 ml graduated cylinder (teacher use only) • Insulating tape Preparation Place some insulating tape over the scale of the beaker. Use the graduated cylinder to measure 150 ml of the salt solution and put it into the gas jar. Place the gas jar, half metre rule, vernier callipers, empty beaker and electronic balance on the bench at workstation. Ensure all instruments are zeroed as appropriate. Action at changeover Pour the 150 ml salt solution into the gas jar. Place apparatus as at start of experiment with all instruments zeroed. Question 2 Requirements • Thermistor EPCOS B57164K471J or similar (KED471). RS 191–2229 • 1.5 V D cell • Digital milliammeter 0–20 mA to 0.01 mA • Digital voltmeter 0–20 V to 0.01 V • Connecting leads with 5 mm plugs at each end × 6 • 250 ml beaker • Water at room temperature • Crushed ice • Retort stand and clamp • Switch • Method of clamping the thermistor into retort stand, e.g. component holder with crocodile clips. • Dessert spoon/soup spoon • Thermometer with range -10°C to 110°C 5 11141.03 Preparation Set up the circuit shown in Fig 2.1. A V Fig. 2.1 Attach the thermistor to the crocodile clips of a component holder. Clamp the component holder and thermometer in a retort stand and place in a beaker of water at room temperature as shown in Fig. 2.2(a) and (b). Fig. 2.2(a) Fig. 2.2(b) Source: Chief Examiner Source: Chief Examiner Action at Changeover Replace the iced water in the beaker with water at room temperature. To do this slide the retort stand towards the edge of the bench so that the beaker can be lowered off the edge of the bench as shown in Fig 2.3. Fig 2.3 Source: Chief Examiner

6 11141.03 Question 3 Requirements • 20 cm converging lens and holder • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10 ±1 mm) and crosswires as used in 2011 A2 3 • Screen – plain white paper • Metre rule • 30 cm rule Preparation Illuminated object (washer and cross) construction. Measure the height H of the centre of the lens, mounted in the lens holder above the surface of the bench. Take a sheet of stiff card and use a sharp knife to cut a square aperture of side 40 mm so that the centre of the square is a distance H from the marked edge of the card. The width W of the card depends on the dimensions of the lens holder. Cut a piece of tracing or greaseproof paper about 60 mm square. In the centre of this square use a fi ne felt tip pen ( or similar) to mark an “X” with the arms at least 10 mm long. Place the washer over the “X” so that the intersection of the arms is at the centre of the circular hole in the washer. Using transparent self-adhesive tape, attach the washer to the tracing paper. Avoid covering any part of the hole in the washer. Place the tracing paper on the card so that the washer is at the centre of the 40 mm square aperture, with the washer inside the opening. Tape the tracing paper to the cardboard. The completed object is illustrated in Fig 3.1 Fig. 3.1 Washer and “X” object (not to scale) Place apparatus at workstation. Check that the magnifi cation of the object is approximately 2 when the object distance is 30 cm. Action at Changeover Dismantle all apparatus and leave as at start of experiment.

7 11141.03 Question 4 Requirements • Pendulum bob, string and split cork • Retort stand, clamp and boss • Stopclock to 0.01 s • Metre rule Preparation Tie the pendulum bob to the end of the string. Thread the pendulum string through the split cork. Position the split cork in the jaws of the clamp. Set the length of the pendulum to be 0.500 m. Leave the metre rule and stopclock beside the pendulum. Action at Changeover Return the length of the pendulum to 0.500 m and rezero the stopclock. 11141.03

3 11232.03 Question 1 Requirements • 2 × wooden half-metre rules • Thread • Stop-clock • Retort stand, boss head and clamp Preparation Suspend one half-metre rule at a distance of 30 cm below the other, using 2 pieces of thread which are tied in loops around each rule. The loops must be reasonably secure, but free enough to be moved along the rules. Check that there are no splinters! The upper rule should be clamped securely in position above the desk, so that both rules are horizontal and so that the lower rule can complete an oscillation about a vertical axis. Testing Periods of oscillation for the lower rule should fall between approx. 1 s for a 14 cm separation and 0.8 when the strings are separated by 38 cm. Action at changeover The loops of thread should be positioned 18 cm from each end of both upper and lower rules, 14 cm apart, and the arrangement is symmetrical about the centre of oscillation. Re-set the stop-clock.

4 11232.03 Question 2 Requirements • Wooden metre-rule 1 • Light box/ray box 1 • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10mm) and crosswires as used in 2011 A2 3 shown in Fig. 2.1. 1 • Lens holder 1 • Screen (plain white screen) 1 • Converging lens, f = 15cm 1 5 11232.03 Illuminated object (washer and cross) construction Measure the height H of the centre of the lens, mounted in the lens holder above the surface of the bench. Take a sheet of stiff card and use a sharp knife to cut a square aperture of side 40mm so that the centre of the square is a distance H from the marked edge of the card. The width W of the card depends on the dimensions of the lens holder. Cut a piece of tracing or greaseproof paper about 60mm square. In the centre of this square use a fine felt tip pen (of similar) to mark an “X” with the arms at least 10mm long. Place the washer over the “X” so that the intersection of the arms is at the centre of the circular hole in the washer. Using transparent self-adhesive tape, attach the washer to the tracing paper. Avoid covering any part of the hole in the washer. Place the tracing paper on the card so that the washer is at the centre of the 40mm square aperture, with the washer inside the opening. Tape the tracing paper to the cardboard. The completed object is illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Fig. 2.1 Washer and “X” object (not to scale) Preparation The metre-rule should be secured to the desk with the light box secured to the 0cm mark. The lens should be placed in the lens holder in an upright position. The lens holder and screen should be placed along the metre-rule. Check that for a screen position of 650mm from the object clear images are visible at approx. 360mm and 280mm Before the Examination The object and lens should be aligned so that an image is visible on the screen. Place the screen at the 50cm mark. Action at Changeover Ensure the rule and light box are fixed in their positions. Replace the screen at the 50cm mark and ensure the lens is upright in its holder. × tracing paper 60mm × 60mm aperture 40mm × 40mm washer 10mm internal diameter 61 mm cardboard marked edge tape H W 6 11232.03 7 11232.03 8 11232.03 11232.04 ADVANCED General Certificate of Education 2018 APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST Physics Assessment Unit A2 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [APH31] WEDNESDAY 9 MAY, MORNING New Specifi cation 2 11232.04 PHYSICS UNIT 3 (A2 3A) APPARATUS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR PRACTICAL ASSESSMENT CONFIDENTIAL This document gives preliminary information on the apparatus and materials required for the A2 Practical Assessment. Information about the apparatus and materials required for this assessment must NOT be communicated to students. If apparatus/materials have their serial code and/or manufacturer specifi ed then it is essential that centres use this exact apparatus/material. On receipt of this APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST, centres must contact Gavin Gray, ggray@ccea.org.uk immediately if they have difficulty in sourcing the specified apparatus or materials. Teachers will be given detailed instructions for setting up the experiment in the Confi dential Instructions for Physics Practical Test, to which they will have confi dential access from April 2018. Teachers will have confi dential access to a copy of the experimental test two working days (48 hours) before the start of the assessment. The A2 3 Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills consisting of two experimental tests (40 marks). The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. The apparatus in the following list will allow for one experiment to be set up for the practical test which makes up questions 1–2. In other words, each set of apparatus (as listed on page 3) will accommodate two candidates when doing the circus of experiments. The apparatus can be used for alternative sessions according to the following schedule: 9 May 2018 Physics A2 3A (APH31) (Main Session) 9.15 am–10.15 am (First Alternative) 10.30 am–11.30 am (Second Alternative) 11.45 am–12.45 pm (Third Alternative) 1.15 pm–2.15 pm (Fourth Alternative) 2.30 pm–3.30 pm One set of apparatus for A2 3A (APH31) will therefore be suffi cient for ten candidates on 9 May if the Main Session and all four alternatives are used. A laboratory may contain one, two, three or more sets of apparatus. This means that two, four, six, eight or more candidates can be accommodated in the same session. To maintain the confi dentiality of details of the practical tests, candidates entered for any of the alternative sessions must be segregated within the centre so that there can be no contact with candidates who have taken an earlier test in any centre. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Test from the suppliers as soon as possible.

3 11232.04 Question 1 Requirements • 2 × wooden half-metre rules • Thread • Stop-clock • Retort stand, boss head and clamp Question 2 Requirements • Wooden metre-rule 1 • Light box/ray box 1 • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10mm) and crosswires as used in 2011 A2 3 shown in Fig. 2.1 below. 1 • Lens holder 1 • Screen (plain white screen) 1 • Converging lens, f = 15cm 1 Fig. 2.1

page 48 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Question 1 – Figure 1A – CG Stocker/Shutterstock.com Question 3 – Figure 3A – dashadima/Shutterstock.com Question 15 – Figure 15A – Luciano Cosmo/shutterstock.com © National Qualications 2018 AH X757/77/11 Physics Relationships Sheet TUESDAY, 8 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB page 02 Relationships required for Physics Advanced Higher ds v dt = 2 2 dv d s a dt dt = = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + dθ ω dt = 2 2 dω d θ α dt dt = = o ω ω αt = + 2 1 2 o θ ω t αt = + 2 2 2 o ω ω αθ = + s rθ = v rω = ta rα = 2 2 r v a rω r = = 2 2 mv F mrω r = = T Fr = T Iα = 2 L mvr mr ω = = L Iω = 2 1 2 K E Iω = 2 Mm F G r = GM V r = − 2GM v r = 2 apparent brightness, 4 L b πr = 4 Power per unit area σT = 2 4 4 L πr σT = 2 2 Schwarzschild GM r c = E hf = h λ p = 2 nh mvr π = 4 x h x p π Δ Δ ≥ 4 h E t π Δ Δ ≥ F qvB = 2 ω πf = 2π ω T = page 03 cos sin or y A ωt y A ωt = = ( ) 2 2 v ω A y = ± − ( ) 2 2 2 1 2 K E mω A y = − 2 2 1 2 P E mω y = sin ( ) 2 x y A π ft λ = − 2 E kA = 2πx λ = φ , , .... 1 optical path difference or 2 where 0 1 2 mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = 2 λl x d Δ = 4 λ d n = λD x d Δ = tan P n i = 1 2 2 4 o Q Q F πε r = 2 4 o Q E πε r = 4 o Q V πε r = F QE = V Ed = sin F IlB θ = 2 oμ I B πr = 1 o o c ε μ = t RC = C V X I = 1 2 C X πfC = dI L dt ε = − 2 1 2 E LI = L V X I = 2 L X πfL = 2 2 2 W X Y Z W X Y Z Δ Δ Δ Δ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ = + + ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ ⎝ ⎠ 2 2 2 W X Y Z Δ = Δ + Δ + Δ 2 2 2 d y a ω y dt = = − page 04 d vt = s vt = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + W mg = F ma = W E Fd = P E mgh = 2 1 2 K E mv = E P t = p mv = Ft mv mu = − 2 Mm F G r = ( ) 2 1 t t vc ′ = − ( ) 2 1 v l l c ′ = − o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ observed rest rest λ λ z λ − = v z c = 0 v H d = W QV = 2 E mc = E hf = 0 K E hf hf = − 2 1 E E hf − = 1 T f = v fλ = sin d θ mλ = sin sin 1 2 θ n θ = sin sin 1 1 1 2 2 2 θ λ v θ λ v = = sin 1 cθ n = 2 k I d = P I A = , , ... 1 path difference or where 0 1 2 2 mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = max. value min. value random uncertainty number of values − = 2 peak rms V V = 2 peak rms I I = Q It = V IR = 2 2 V P IV I R R = = = .... 1 2 T R R R = + + .... 1 2 1 1 1 T R R R = + + E V Ir = + 1 1 1 2 S R V V R R ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ 1 1 2 2 V R V R = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV CV C = = = Q C V = page 05 Additional Relationships Circle Sphere Trigonometry Moment of inertia point mass rod about centre rod about end disc about centre sphere about centre Table of standard derivatives ( ) f x ( ) f x ′ sin ax cos a ax cosax sin a ax − Table of standard integrals ( ) f x ( ) f x dx ∫ sin ax cos 1 ax C a − + cosax sin 1 ax C a + circumference 2πr = 2 area πr = 2 area 4πr = 3 4 3 volume πr = sin opposite hypotenuse θ = cos adjacent hypotenuse θ = tan opposite adjacent θ = sin cos 2 2 1 θ θ + = 2 I mr = 2 1 12 I ml = 2 1 3 I ml = 2 1 2 I mr = 2 2 5 I mr = page 06 Electron Arrangements of Elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition Elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides page 07 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 08 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE

page 03 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. A car is moving at a speed of 2·0 m s−1. The car now accelerates at 4·0 m s−2 until it reaches a speed of 14 m s−1. The distance travelled by the car during this acceleration is A 1·5 m B 18 m C 24 m D 25 m E 48 m. 2. A ball is dropped from rest and allowed to bounce several times. The graph shows how the velocity of the ball varies with time. P Q time velocity S R 0 A student makes the following statements about the ball. I The ball hits the ground at P. II The ball is moving upwards between Q and R. III The ball is moving upwards between R and S. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I and III only [Turn over

page 04 3. A block of mass 6·0 kg and a block of mass 8·0 kg are connected by a string. A force of 32 N is applied to the blocks as shown. 8·0 kg 6·0 kg 32 N A frictional force of 4·0 N acts on each block. The acceleration of the 6·0 kg block is A 1·7 m s−2 B 2·0 m s−2 C 2·3 m s−2 D 2·9 m s−2 E 5·3 m s−2. 4. A person stands on a weighing machine in a lift. When the lift is at rest, the reading on the weighing machine is 700 N. The lift now descends and its speed increases at a constant rate. The reading on the weighing machine A is a constant value higher than 700 N B is a constant value lower than 700 N C continually increases from 700 N D continually decreases from 700 N E remains constant at 700 N. 5. Enceladus is a moon of Saturn. The mass of Enceladus is 1·08 × 1020 kg. The mass of Saturn is 5·68 × 1026 kg. The gravitational force of attraction between Enceladus and Saturn is 7·24 × 1019 N. The orbital radius of Enceladus around Saturn is A 2·38 × 108 m B 9·11 × 1013 m C 5·65 × 1016 m D 8·30 × 1027 m E 3·19 × 1033 m.

page 05 6. A spacecraft is travelling at 0·10c relative to a star. An observer on the spacecraft measures the speed of light emitted by the star to be A 0·90c B 0·99c C 1·00c D 1·01c E 1·10c. 7. A spacecraft is travelling at a speed of 0·200c relative to the Earth. The spacecraft emits a signal for 20·0 seconds as measured in the frame of reference of the spacecraft. An observer on Earth measures the duration of the signal as A 19·2 s B 19·6 s C 20·0 s D 20·4 s E 20·8 s. 8. How many types of quark are there? A 8 B 6 C 4 D 3 E 2 9. An electron is a A boson B hadron C baryon D meson E lepton. [Turn over

page 06 10. A proton enters a region of magnetic field as shown. region of magnetic field into page proton On entering the magnetic field the proton A deflects into the page B deflects out of the page C deflects towards the top of the page D deflects towards the bottom of the page E is not deflected. 11. A nuclear fission reaction is represented by the following statement. 1 235 141 1 0 92 56 0 n U Ba X 3 n + → + + The nucleus represented by X is A 96 40Zr B 92 36Kr C 97 40Zr D 93 36Kr E 94 40Zr. 12. The irradiance on a surface 0·50 m from a point source of light is I. The irradiance on a surface 1·5 m from this source is A 0·11I B 0·33I C 1·5I D 3·0I E 9·0I.

page 07 13. Waves from two coherent sources, S1 and S2, produce an interference pattern. Maxima are detected at the positions shown below. P maxima S1 S2 The path difference S1P − S2P is 154 mm. The wavelength of the waves is A 15·4 mm B 25·7 mm C 28·0 mm D 30·8 mm E 34·2 mm. [Turn over

page 08 14. A ray of monochromatic light passes from air into a block of glass as shown. air glass not to scale The wavelength of this light in air is 6·30 × 10−7 m. The refractive index of the glass for this light is 1·50. The frequency of this light in the glass is A 2·10 × 10−15 Hz B 1·26 × 102 Hz C 1·89 × 102 Hz D 4·76 × 1014 Hz E 7·14 × 1014 Hz.

page 09 15. A circuit is set up as shown. V 10 Ω 10 Ω 10 Ω S A1 A2 12 V The battery has negligible internal resistance. A student makes the following statements about the readings on the meters in this circuit. I When switch S is open the reading on the voltmeter will be 6·0 V. II When switch S is open the reading on A2 will be 0·60 A. III When switch S is closed the reading on A1 will be 0·80 A. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D II and III only E I, II and III 16. The power dissipated in a 120 Ω resistor is 4·8 W. The current in the resistor is A 0·020 A B 0·040 A C 0·20 A D 5·0 A E 25 A. [Turn over

page 10 17. A 24·0 μF capacitor is charged until the potential difference across it is 125 V. The charge stored on the capacitor is A 5·21 × 106 C B 7·75 × 10−2 C C 1·50 × 10−3 C D 3·00 × 10−3 C E 1·92 × 10−7 C. 18. A circuit is set up as shown. 12 V 220 μF When the capacitor is fully charged the energy stored in the capacitor is A 1·6 × 10−5 J B 1·3 × 10−3 J C 2·6 × 10−3 J D 1·6 × 10−2 J E 1·6 × 104 J.

page 11 19. The circuit shown is used to charge and then discharge a capacitor C. R C to oscilloscope Which pair of graphs shows how the potential difference V across the capacitor varies with time t during charging and discharging? A B C D E t t t t t t t t t t V V V V V V V V V V 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Charging Discharging [Turn over for next question

page 12 20. A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity c of a solid. The relationship used to calculate c is E c m T = Δ The recorded measurements and their percentage uncertainties are shown. energy supplied, E = 5000 J ± 1% mass of solid, m = 0·20 kg ± 2% change in temperature, ∆T = 4·5 °C ± 5% A good estimate of the percentage uncertainty in the calculated value of c is A 8% B 7% C 5% D 3% E 1%. [END OF SECTION 1. NOW ATTEMPT THE QUESTIONS IN SECTION 2 OF YOUR QUESTION AND ANSWER BOOKLET] H FOR OFFICIAL USE Fill in these boxes and read what is printed below. Number of seat Town © Mark Full name of centre Forename(s) Surname Scottish candidate number Date of birth Year Day Month National Qualications 2018 Total marks — 130 SECTION 1 — 20 marks Attempt ALL questions. Instructions for the completion of Section 1 are given on page 02. SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions. Reference may be made to the Data Sheet on page 02 of the question paper X757/76/02 and to the Relationships Sheet X757/76/11. Care should be taken to give an appropriate number of significant figures in the final answers to calculations. Write your answers clearly in the spaces provided in this booklet. Additional space for answers and rough work is provided at the end of this booklet. If you use this space you must clearly identify the question number you are attempting. Any rough work must be written in this booklet. You should score through your rough work when you have written your final copy. Use blue or black ink. Before leaving the examination room you must give this booklet to the Invigilator; if you do not, you may lose all the marks for this paper. X757/76/01 TUESDAY, 8 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB Physics Section 1 — Answer Grid and Section 2 page 02 SECTION 1 — 20 marks The questions for Section 1 are contained in the question paper X757/76/02. Read these and record your answers on the answer grid on page 03 opposite. Use blue or black ink. Do NOT use gel pens or pencil. 1. The answer to each question is either A, B, C, D or E. Decide what your answer is, then fill in the appropriate bubble (see sample question below). 2. There is only one correct answer to each question. 3. Any rough working should be done on the additional space for answers and rough work at the end of this booklet. Sample question The energy unit measured by the electricity meter in your home is the A ampere B kilowatt-hour C watt D coulomb E volt. The correct answer is B — kilowatt-hour. The answer B bubble has been clearly filled in (see below). A B C D E Changing an answer If you decide to change your answer, cancel your first answer by putting a cross through it (see below) and fill in the answer you want. The answer below has been changed to D. A B C D E If you then decide to change back to an answer you have already scored out, put a tick (3) to the right of the answer you want, as shown below: A B C D E or A B C D E page 03 A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SECTION 1 — Answer Grid [Turn over page 04 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 05 [Turn over for SECTION 2 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 06 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN SECTION 2 — 110 marks Attempt ALL questions 1. During a school funfair, a student throws a wet sponge at a teacher. The sponge is thrown with an initial velocity of 7·4 m s−1 at an angle of 30° to the horizontal. The sponge leaves the student’s hand at a height of 1·5 m above the ground. h 7·4 m s−1 30° 1·5 m not to scale The sponge hits the teacher. The effects of air resistance can be ignored. (a) (i) Calculate: (A) the horizontal component of the initial velocity of the sponge; Space for working and answer (B) the vertical component of the initial velocity of the sponge. Space for working and answer 1 1 page 07 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (a) (continued) (ii) Calculate the time taken for the sponge to reach its maximum height. Space for working and answer (iii) The sponge takes a further 0·45 s to travel from its maximum height until it hits the teacher. Determine the height h above the ground at which the sponge hits the teacher. Space for working and answer (b) The student throwing the sponge makes the following statement. “If the sponge is thrown with a higher speed at the same angle from the same height then it would take a shorter time to hit the teacher in the same place.” Explain why the student’s statement is incorrect. 3 4 2 [Turn over page 08 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. An internet shopping company is planning to use drones to deliver packages. package drone (a) During a test the drone is hovering at a constant height above the ground. The mass of the drone is 5·50 kg. The mass of the package is 1·25 kg. (i) Determine the upward force produced by the drone. Space for working and answer 3 page 09 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (a) (continued) (ii) The package is now lowered using a motor and a cable. A battery supplies 12 V across the motor. The resistance of the motor is 9∙6 Ω. Calculate the power dissipated by the motor. Space for working and answer (iii) While the package is being lowered the cable breaks. The upward force produced by the drone remains constant. Describe the vertical motion of the drone immediately after the cable breaks. Justify your answer. [Turn over 3 2 page 10 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (continued) (b) To carry a package with a greater mass two drones are used as shown. not to scale cable 3∙4 kg drone 35° package drone cable 35° The drones are hovering at a constant height above the ground. The mass of the package suspended from the two drones is 3·4 kg. Determine the tension in each cable. Space for working and answer 4 page 11 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 12 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. A student sets up an experiment to investigate a collision between two vehicles on a frictionless air track. not to scale card vehicle Y motion sensor vehicle X to computer air track Vehicle X of mass 0·75 kg is travelling to the right along the track. Vehicle Y of mass 0·50 kg is travelling to the left along the track with a speed of 0·30 m s-1. The vehicles collide and move off separately. A computer displays a graph showing the velocity of vehicle X from just before the collision to just after the collision. velocity (m s−1) time (s) 1∙00 0∙90 0∙80 0∙70 0∙50 0∙60 0∙40 0∙30 0∙20 0 0∙10 0∙60 0∙50 0∙40 0∙30 0∙20 0∙10 0 page 13 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. (continued) (a) Show that the velocity of vehicle Y after the collision is 0·42 m s-1. Space for working and answer (b) Determine the impulse on vehicle Y during the collision. Space for working and answer [Turn over 2 3 page 14 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. (continued) (c) Explain how the student would determine whether the collision was elastic or inelastic. 2 page 15 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. A stunt is being carried out during the making of a film. A car is to be driven up a ramp on a moving lorry by a stunt driver, who will attempt to land the car safely on the roof of a second moving lorry. The car is to stop on the roof of the second lorry while this lorry is still moving. Using your knowledge of physics, comment on the challenges involved in carrying out the stunt successfully. [Turn over 3 page 16 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. Hubble’s Law states that the universe is expanding. The expanding universe is one piece of evidence that supports the Big Bang theory. (a) State one other piece of evidence that supports the Big Bang theory. (b) A student plots some of the original data from the 1929 paper by Edwin Hubble and adds the line shown in order to determine a value for the Hubble constant H0. 40 25 500 000 35 15 400 000 30 600 000 300 000 0 200 000 recessional velocity (m s−1) 100 000 distance (× 1021 m) 20 10 5 0 The student calculates the gradient of their line and obtains a value for the Hubble constant of 2∙0 × 10−17 s−1. The age of the universe can be calculated using the relationship 0 1 age of universe H = 1 page 17 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (b) (continued) (i) Calculate the age of the universe, in years, obtained when using the student’s value for the Hubble constant. Space for working and answer (ii) The current estimate for the age of the universe is 13∙8 × 109 years. (A) State why the value obtained in (b)(i) is different from the current estimate for the age of the universe. (B) Suggest a change that the student could make to their graph to obtain a value closer to the current estimate for the age of the universe. (c) It has been discovered that the rate of expansion of the universe is increasing. State what physicists think is responsible for this increase. 2 1 1 1 [Turn over page 18 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. An experiment is set up to demonstrate a simple particle accelerator. vacuum metal cross + fluorescent screen − anode cathode 1·6 kV (a) Electrons are accelerated from rest between the cathode and the anode by a potential difference of 1·6 kV. (i) Show that the work done in accelerating an electron from rest is 2·6 × 10-16 J. Space for working and answer (ii) Calculate the speed of the electron as it reaches the anode. Space for working and answer 2 3 page 19 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. (continued) (b) As the electrons travel through the vacuum towards the fluorescent screen they spread out. In the path of the electrons there is a metal cross, which is connected to the positive terminal of the supply. The electrons that hit the cross are stopped by the metal. Electrons that get past the metal cross hit a fluorescent screen at the far side of the tube. When electrons hit the fluorescent screen, the screen glows. shadow of metal cross glowing fluorescent screen The potential difference between the anode and the cathode is now increased to 2∙2 kV. This changes what is observed on the screen. Suggest one change that is observed. You must justify your answer. [Turn over 2 page 20 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. (continued) (c) A student builds a model of a particle accelerator. The model accelerates a small ball on a circular track. A battery-operated motor accelerates the ball each time it passes the motor. To cause a collision a plastic block is pushed onto the track. The ball then hits the block. ball track motor plastic block Using your knowledge of physics comment on the model compared to a real particle accelerator, such as the large hadron collider at CERN. 3 page 21 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. (c) (continued) [Turn over page 22 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. A student uses a gold-leaf electroscope to investigate the photoelectric effect. A deflection of the gold leaf on the electroscope shows that the metal plate is charged. The student charges the metal plate on the electroscope and the gold leaf is deflected. 0 20 40 60 80 metal rod gold leaf metal plate gold-leaf electroscope (a) Ultraviolet light is shone onto the negatively charged metal plate. The gold-leaf electroscope does not discharge. This indicates that photoelectrons are not ejected from the surface of the metal. Suggest one reason why photoelectrons are not ejected from the surface of the metal. 1 page 23 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (b) The student adjusts the experiment so that the gold-leaf electroscope now discharges when ultraviolet light is shone onto the plate. The work function for the metal plate is 6∙94 × 10−19 J. (i) State what is meant by a work function of 6∙94 × 10−19 J. (ii) The irradiance of the ultraviolet light on the metal plate is reduced by increasing the distance between the gold-leaf electroscope and the ultraviolet light source. State what effect, if any, this has on the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons ejected from the surface of the metal. Justify your answer. [Turn over 1 2 page 24 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (c) The graph shows how the kinetic energy of the photoelectrons ejected from the metal plate varies as the frequency of the incident radiation increases. The threshold frequency for the metal plate is 1∙05 × 1015 Hz. kinetic energy (J) frequency (× 1015 Hz) 1∙05 0 The metal plate is now replaced with a different metal plate made of aluminium. The aluminium has a threshold frequency of 0∙99 × 1015 Hz. Add a line to the graph to show how the kinetic energy of the photoelectrons ejected from the aluminium plate varies as the frequency of the incident radiation increases. (An additional graph, if required, can be found on page 45.) (d) Explain why the photoelectric effect provides evidence for the particle nature of light. 2 1 page 25 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. A student investigates interference of light by directing laser light of wavelength 630 nm onto a grating as shown. not to scale θ screen laser grating (a) A pattern of bright spots is observed on a screen. (i) Explain, in terms of waves, how bright spots are produced on the screen. (ii) The grating has 250 lines per millimetre. Calculate the angle θ between the central maximum and the third order maximum. Space for working and answer [Turn over 1 3 page 26 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. (a) (continued) (iii) The grating is now replaced by one which has 600 lines per millimetre. State the effect of this change on the pattern observed. Justify your answer. (iv) The interference pattern is produced by coherent light. State what is meant by the term coherent. 2 1 page 27 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. (Continued) (b) The student now shines light from the laser onto a £5 note. not to scale screen £5 note laser When it is shone through the transparent section of the note the student observes a pattern of bright spots on the screen. The diagram below shows the pattern that the student observes on the screen. Suggest a reason for the difference in the pattern produced using the £5 note and the pattern produced using the grating. [Turn over 1 page 28 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on a glass prism as shown. glass air incident ray 45·0° 45·0° 68·0° 22·0° 60·0° 60·0° 60·0° (a) Show that the refractive index of the glass for this ray of light is 1∙89. Space for working and answer (b) (i) State what is meant by the term critical angle. 2 1 page 29 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. (b) (continued) (ii) Calculate the critical angle for this light in the prism. Space for working and answer (iii) Complete the diagram below to show the path of the ray as it passes through the prism and emerges into the air. Mark on the diagram the values of all relevant angles. glass air incident ray 45·0° 45·0° 68·0° 22·0° 60·0° 60·0° 60·0° (An additional diagram, if required, can be found on page 45.) [Turn over 3 4 page 30 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. (continued) (c) A ray of white light is shone through the prism and a spectrum is observed as shown. screen violet red air glass white light The prism is now replaced with another prism made from a different type of glass with a lower refractive index. Describe one difference in the spectrum produced by this prism compared to the spectrum produced by the first prism. 1 page 31 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. In a laboratory experiment, light from a hydrogen discharge lamp is used to produce a line emission spectrum. The line spectrum for hydrogen has four lines in the visible region as shown. (a) The production of the line spectrum can be explained using the Bohr model of the atom. State two features of the Bohr model of the atom. [Turn over 2 page 32 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. (continued) (b) Some of the energy levels of the hydrogen atom are shown. E0 E1 −5·45 × 10−19 J E2 E3 E4 −21·8 × 10−19 J −2·42 × 10−19 J −1·36 × 10−19 J −0·871 × 10−19 J One of the spectral lines is due to electron transitions from E3 to E1. Determine the frequency of the photon emitted when an electron makes this transition. Space for working and answer 3 page 33 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. (continued) (c) In the laboratory, a line in the hydrogen spectrum is observed at a wavelength of 656 nm. When the spectrum of light from a distant galaxy is viewed, this hydrogen line is now observed at a wavelength of 661 nm. Determine the recessional velocity of the distant galaxy. Space for working and answer [Turn over 5 page 34 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. A student constructs a battery using a potato, a strip of copper and a strip of magnesium. potato magnesium copper The student then sets up the following circuit with the potato battery connected to a variable resistor R, in order that the electromotive force (e.m.f.) and internal resistance of the battery may be determined. potato battery r E R V A (a) State what is meant by the term electromotive force (e.m.f.). 1 page 35 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. (continued) (b) The student uses readings of current I and terminal potential difference V from this circuit to produce the graph shown. 180 0 160 20 140 40 120 700 100 600 80 500 I (μA) 400 V (mV) 300 60 200 100 0 Determine the internal resistance of the potato battery. Space for working and answer [Turn over 3 page 36 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. (continued) (c) The student connects a red LED and a blue LED, in turn, to the battery. The LEDs are forward biased when connected. The student observes that the battery will operate the red LED but not the blue LED. The diagram represents the band structure of the blue LED. electrons in valence band electrons in conduction band p-type n-type band gap LEDs emit light when electrons fall from the conduction band into the valence band of the p-type semiconductor. Explain, using band theory, why the blue LED will not operate with this battery. 1 page 37 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 38 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. A student carries out a series of experiments to investigate alternating current. (a) A signal generator is connected to an oscilloscope and a circuit as shown. green LED A signal generator red LED oscilloscope The output of the signal generator is displayed on the oscilloscope. div div The Y-gain setting on the oscilloscope is 1·0 V/div. The timebase setting on the oscilloscope is 0·5 s/div. page 39 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (a) (continued) (i) Determine the peak voltage of the output of the signal generator. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the frequency of the output of the signal generator. Space for working and answer (iii) The student observes that the red LED is only lit when the ammeter gives a positive reading and the green LED is only lit when the ammeter gives a negative reading. Explain these observations. 1 3 2 [Turn over page 40 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (continued) (b) The signal generator is now connected in a circuit as shown. The settings on the signal generator are unchanged. The signal generator has negligible internal resistance. signal generator 68 Ω 82 Ω Determine the r.m.s. voltage across the 82 Ω resistor. Space for working and answer 5 page 41 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. A student sets up an experiment to investigate the pressure due to a liquid as shown. h meter pressure sensor liquid glass tube The pressure due to a liquid is given by the relationship p ρgh = where p is the pressure due to the liquid in pascals (Pa), g is the gravitational field strength in N kg−1, ρ is the density of the liquid in kg m−3, and h is the depth in the liquid in m. (a) The student initially carries out the investigation using water. The density of water is 1·00 × 103 kg m−3. Calculate the pressure due to the water at a depth of 0·35 m. Space for working and answer 2 [Turn over

page 42 13. (continued) (b) The student repeats the experiment with a different liquid. The pressure meter is set to zero before the glass tube is lowered into the liquid. The student takes measurements of the pressure at various depths below the surface of the liquid. The student records the following information. Depth, h (m) Pressure, p (kPa) 0·10 1·2 0·20 2·5 0·30 3·6 0·40 4·9 0·50 6·2 (i) Using the square-ruled paper on page 43, draw a graph of p against h. (Additional graph paper, if required, can be found on page 44.) (ii) Calculate the gradient of your graph. Space for working and answer (iii) Determine the density of this liquid. Space for working and answer [END OF QUESTION PAPER] 3 2 2 page 43 page 44 page 45 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional graph for use with Question 7 (c) kinetic energy (J) frequency (× 1015 Hz) 1∙05 0 Additional diagram for use with Question 9 (b) (iii) glass air incident ray 45·0° 45·0° 68·0° 22·0° 60·0° 60·0° 60·0° page 46 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK page 47 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK

page 48 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Question 1 – Snap2Art/Shutterstock.com Question 2 (b) – Studio Caramel/Shutterstock.com Question 6 (c) – Image is taken from http://jkbrickworks.com/jkbw/wp-content/uploads/2014/11/ accelerator.jpg?x84406. Reproduced by kind permission of Jason Allemann. © National Qualications 2018 H X757/76/11 Physics Relationships Sheet TUESDAY, 8 MAY 9:00 AM – 11:30 AM A/PB page 02 d vt = s vt = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + W mg = F ma = ( ) 2 1 t t vc ′ = − ( ) 2 1 v l l c ′ = − o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ observed rest rest λ λ z λ − = v z c = 0 v H d = 2 E mc = E hf = 0 k E hf hf = − 2 1 E E hf − = 1 T f = v fλ = sin d θ mλ = sin sin 1 2 θ n θ = sin sin 1 1 1 2 2 2 θ λ v θ λ v = = sin 1 cθ n = 2 k I d = P I A = , , ... 1 2 path difference or where 0 1 2 mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = max. value min. value random uncertainty number of values − = 2 peak rms V V = 2 peak rms I I = Q It = V IR = 2 2 V P IV I R R = = = .... 1 2 T R R R = + + .... 1 2 1 1 1 T R R R = + + E V Ir = + 1 1 1 2 s R V V R R ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ 1 1 2 2 V R V R = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV CV C = = = Q C V = W QV = W E Fd = p E mgh = 2 1 2 k E mv = E P t = p mv = Ft mv mu = − 1 2 2 m m F G r = Relationships required for Physics Higher page 03 Additional Relationships Circle Sphere Trigonometry circumference 2πr = 2 area πr = 2 area 4πr = 3 4 3 volume πr = sin opposite hypotenuse θ = cos adjacent hypotenuse θ = tan opposite adjacent θ = sin cos 2 2 1 θ θ + = page 04 Electron Arrangements of Elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition Elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides

12016 10 (a) A potential divider circuit is set up as shown in Fig. 10.1. 1.10 kΩ 12 V 0.80 kΩ Fig. 10.1 Calculate the potential difference across the 0.80 kΩ resistor. Potential difference =                     V [3] 12016 THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER (b) (i) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how a light dependent resistor, LDR, can be used in a potential divider circuit to automatically switch on a light bulb when it gets dark. [2] (ii) Explain briefly how this circuit allows the light bulb to be turned on automatically. [2] 12016 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 12016 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Marks Examiner Number 243453 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 11378 DATA AND FORMULAE SHEET for use from 2017 onwards Physics [SPH11/SPH21] ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY General Certifi cate of Education Assessment Units AS 1 and AS 2 11378 11378 2 Data and Formulae Sheet for AS 1 and AS 2 Values of constants speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1 elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10–19 C the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg acceleration of free fall on the Earth’s surface g = 9.81 m s–2 electron volt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19 J the Hubble constant H0 ≈ 2.4 × 10–18 s–1 Useful formulae The following equations may be useful in answering some of the questions in the examination: Mechanics conservation of energy 1 2 mv 2 – 1 2 mu 2 = Fs for a constant force Waves two-source interference λ = ay d diffraction grating d sinθ = nλ 11378 11378 3 Light lens equation 1 u 1 v 1 f + = Electricity terminal potential difference V = E – Ir (e.m.f., E; Internal Resistance, r) potential divider Vout = R1Vin R1 + R2 Particles and photons Einstein’s equation 1 2 mv max 2 = hf – hf0 de Broglie equation λ = h p Astronomy red shift z = Δλ λ recession speed z = v c Hubble’s law v = H0 d 11378 11378 4

4 11969.02 Question 1 • Extension (disposable) spring unextended length 20 mm • 100 g mass holder × 2 • 100 g slotted mass × 4 • Half metre rule • Retort stand, boss head and clamp • Labels Question 2 • 22 Ω resistor × 4 • 15 Ω resistor × 2 • Milliammeter (range 0–200 mA reading to 0.1 mA) • Voltmeter (range 0–20V to 0.01V) • Connecting wires with fitted plug × 5 • Crocodile clips × 2 • 4.5 V d.c. supply (batteries or power pack) • Box or similar to conceal power supply • Masking tape • Labels Question 3 • Single layer DVD or CD ROM × 4 • 10 g mass (diameter approx. 33 mm) × 2 • 20 g mass (diameter approx. 33 mm) × 2 • Stopclock • Double sided foam sticky pads, e.g. Sellotape sticky fixers × 6 • Labels/marker suitable for writing on DVD

5 11969.02 Question 4 • Ray box and suitable power supply • Single slit • Mirror and holder • 30 cm ruler • Rectangular glass block (NB: a block with a white face is not suitable for this experiment) • Sticky label 11969.03 ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY (AS) General Certificate of Education 2019 CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS Physics Assessment Unit AS 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [SPH31] FRIDAY 3 MAY 2 11969.03 1 Confidential Instructions These instructions will give detailed guidance on setting up and testing the apparatus and materials to be used. Again, information contained within the Confidential Instructions must not be relayed to candidates under any circumstances. If at this point, centres find that the testing process produces results different to those specified in the Confidential Instructions, they must contact the CCEA Science Subject Officer (ggray@ccea.org.uk) immediately. 2 Final Apparatus Testing The practical assessment question paper will be made available to the Head of Physics two working days before the timetabled starting time so that teachers and technicians can carry out a final test on the experiments. If on checking the apparatus gives unexpected results, the CCEA Physics Subject Officer should be contacted immediately (ggray@ccea.org.uk). If the problem cannot be resolved, then the centre must e-mail the CCEA Physics Subject Officer stating the centre name and number, the specific nature of the problem and the range of anomalous results produced. CCEA will respond by acknowledging receipt of the e-mail. If you do not receive a response within 24 hours, please contact the CCEA Physics Subject Officer by telephone (028 90261200 Ext 2270) to confirm that CCEA has received your e-mail. 3 Practical Assessment AS 3A The AS 3A Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills comprised of 4 short experimental tests. The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. Some of this time will be set aside for supervisors to re-set the apparatus ready for the next candidates. The assessment should be run as a circus of experiments with candidates moving to the next experiment at the designated time. The assessment should be timed as follows: Questions Time Q1 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q2 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q3 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q4 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes End of test write-up 4 minutes At the end of each 12 minute period, candidates must stop using the apparatus. During each 2 minute changeover period candidates may write up anything they have not completed however they will not have access to the apparatus. At the end of the test a 4 minute period is provided for candidates to complete their answer to any question, however they will not have access to the apparatus. 3 11969.03 4 After the Practical Assessments When the individual exam sessions have finished, please return the AS 3A practical scripts together with the corresponding advice notes to the examinations officer (EO). We will collect these by the day after the examination. If we don’t, please contact us immediately to arrange another time for collection. Where the centre finds that a candidate may have been disadvantaged because the apparatus did not function as intended, the supervising teachers should make a report to the EO. The EO will forward the confidential report on the issue and the candidates affected to the centre support section at CCEA for special consideration. Candidates should be identified by their examination number. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Tests from the suppliers as soon as possible.

4 11969.03 Question 1 Requirements • Extension (disposable) spring unextended length 20 mm • 100 g mass holder × 2 • 100 g slotted mass × 4 • Half metre rule • Retort stand, boss head & clamp • Labels Preparation Connect the boss head and clamp to the retort stand. Before the examination Suspend the unextended spring from the clamp. Place one 100 g mass onto a 100 g mass hanger, label this ‘200g’. Place three 100 g masses onto the other mass hanger, label this ‘400g’. Set these beside the retort stand. Set the half metre rule close to the retort stand. Action at changeover Return the apparatus to the original arrangement on the bench.

5 11969.03 Question 2 Requirements • 22 Ω resistor × 4 • 15 Ω resistor × 2 • Milliammeter (range 0–200 mA reading to 0.1 mA) • Voltmeter (range 0–20V to 0.01V) • Connecting wires with fitted plug × 5 • Crocodile clips × 2 • 4.5V d.c. supply (batteries or power pack) • Box or similar to conceal power supply • Masking tape • Labels Preparation Use the masking tape to conceal the markings on all the resistors. Label the 22 Ω resistors ‘A’ and the 15 Ω resistors ‘B’. Connect two 22 Ω resistors and a 15 Ω resistor in series. Connect two 22 Ω resistors in parallel with each other and put these in series with a 15 Ω resistor. Conceal the power supply and leave the two end terminals exposed with leads attached. Label the concealed box ‘power supply’. Set the milliammeter to the 200 mA setting and tape the dial in place so that it cannot be moved by the candidate. Before the examination Leave all the equipment on the desk – both resistor networks, the concealed power supply, milliammeter, voltmeter and the remaining three connecting wires and crocodile clips. Action at changeover Disconnect any circuit, returning the apparatus to the original arrangement.

6 11969.03 Question 3 Requirements • Single layer DVD or CD ROM × 4 • 10 g mass (diameter approx. 33 mm) × 2 • 20 g mass (diameter approx. 33 mm) × 2 • Stopclock • Double sided foam sticky pads, e.g. Sellotape sticky fixers × 6 • Labels/marker suitable for writing on DVD Preparation Use the double sided foam sticky pads to stick one of the 10 g masses to the DVD/CD as shown in Fig 3.1. Stick another 10 g mass directly on top of the fi rst and then a second DVD/CD on top. Label this ‘System 1: m = 25 g’. The arrangement should sit as shown in Fig 3.1. Repeat with the other 2 DVD/CDs, this time with two 20 g masses stuck in between. Label this ‘System 2: m = 45 g’. Draw an arrow pointing vertically downwards when the DVD/CD sits on the bench as shown in Fig 3.2. When displaced slightly the system should oscillate in excess of 10 oscillations. The period of oscillation of System 2 should be less than System 1. Side view double sided foam sticky pads 10g masses desk DVD/CDs Front view Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2 Before the examination Set system 1 upright on the desk. Leave the other on the desk close by with the stopclock. Action at changeover Return the apparatus to the original arrangement.

7 11969.03 Question 4 Requirements • Raybox and suitable power supply • Single slit • Mirror and holder • 30 cm ruler • Rectangular glass block (NB: A block with a white face is not suitable for this experiment) • Sticky label Preparation Place a sticky label on the long narrow face of the block and label it F. To ensure the complete path of the ray is visible, it is best to place the apparatus for Question 4 in a dimly lit area. Before the examination Connect the power pack to the raybox and insert the single slit into the raybox. Set all of the apparatus on the desk. Action at changeover Return the apparatus to the original arrangement.

11970.05R 5 Equation 5.1 is the lens equation. 1 = 1 + 1 f u v      Equation 5.1 An experimental arrangement to verify the lens equation is shown in Fig. 5.1. screen metre rule lens illuminated object Fig. 5.1 In this experiment the lens was kept in a fixed position at the 50.0 cm mark on the metre rule. The object position Po was initially at the 100.0 cm mark on the metre rule. The screen was moved until a focused image was produced. The position PI of the screen on the metre rule was recorded in Table 5.1. To get a series of results to verify Equation 5.1, Po was changed. (a) What type of lens must be used in this experiment? [1] 11970.05R [Turn over (b) The results were recorded in Table 5.1. The raw data in Table 5.1 cannot be used directly to verify the lens equation. Add any additional necessary columns and appropriate headings to Table 5.1 that would allow graphical verification of the lens equation. Now complete the row for Po = 100.0 cm. You do not need to complete the table for any of the other Po values [4] Table 5.1 Po / cm PI / cm 1 2 3 Mean 100.0 28.6 28.8 29.4 95.0 27.5 27.2 27.7 90.0 26.0 25.6 25.8 85.0 23.8 24.2 23.5 80.0 20.0 20.5 20.3 (c) Compare the uncertainty in the values of Po and PI. Explain any difference in the uncertainties of the values. [3] 11970.05R 6 A linear air track is a device used to study motion in a low friction environment. Air is pumped through small holes in a long hollow track. This allows gliders, that are lifted just above the surface of the track by the air, to move friction-free along the track. In an experiment to verify the principle of conservation of momentum, two identical gliders were used, one at rest and the other moving towards it at a constant velocity. After the collision both moved together along the remainder of the air track. (a) Suggest how it is ensured that the gliders do not separate after the collision. [1] (b) The air track and two gliders, labelled A and B, are shown in Fig. 6.1. Glider A is moving to the right, glider B is stationary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A B air track card Fig. 6.1 (i) Two light gates, connected to appropriate software, are used to determine the velocity of the card on top of glider A before and after the collision. On Fig. 6.1 mark suitable positions for the light gates. Label the positions 1 for the first light gate and 2 for the second light gate. [2] 11970.05R (ii) What information must be input to the software to allow the velocity to be determined? [1] (c) Show how the principle of conservation of momentum is verified from the results. [3] THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER 11970.05R BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 11970.05R BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. Examiner Number 246886 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 6 Total Marks

page 03 Total mark — 25 Attempt ALL questions 1. The graph shows how the speed v of a car varies with time t. 10·0 15·0 12·0 0 0 v (m s-1) t (s) The average speed of the car during the 12·0 s is A 1·25 m s-1 B 2·08 m s-1 C 2·50 m s-1 D 7·50 m s-1 E 12·5 m s-1. 2. A stone is thrown at 50° to the horizontal with a speed of 15 m s-1. 15 m s-1 50° Which row in the table gives the horizontal component and the vertical component of the initial velocity of the stone? Horizontal component (m s-1) Vertical component (m s-1) A 15 sin 50 15 cos 50 B 15 cos 50 15 sin 50 C 15 cos 50 15 sin 40 D 15 cos 40 15 sin 50 E 15 sin 50 15 cos 40 [Turn over

page 04 3. A golfer strikes a golf ball, which then moves off at an angle to the ground. The ball follows the path shown. The graphs show how the horizontal component of the velocity vh and the vertical component of the velocity vv of the ball vary with time t. 0 40 t (s) t (s) vv (m s-1) vh (m s-1) -30 0 30 The speed of the ball just before it hits the ground is A 10 m s-1 B 30 m s-1 C 40 m s-1 D 50 m s-1 E 70 m s-1.

page 05 4. A car accelerates from rest along a straight level road. The acceleration of the car is constant. Which pair of displacement-time (s-t) and acceleration-time (a-t) graphs represent the motion of the car? t t t t t a a a a a 0 0 0 0 0 t t t t t s s s s s 0 0 0 0 0 D B C A E [Turn over

page 06 5. Four masses on a horizontal, frictionless surface are linked together by strings P, Q and R. A constant force is applied as shown. R Q P 10 kg 40 kg constant force 30 kg 20 kg The tension in the strings is A greatest in P and least in Q B greatest in P and least in R C greatest in R and least in Q D greatest in R and least in P E the same in P, Q and R. 6. A student makes the following statements about an elastic collision. I Total momentum is conserved. II Total kinetic energy is conserved. III Total energy is conserved. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D I and III only E I, II and III

page 07 7. The terminal velocity vt of a skydiver is given by the relationship 2 t d mg v ρAC = where m is the mass of the skydiver in kg g is the gravitational field strength in N kg-1 Cd is the drag coefficient ρ is the density of air in kg m-3 A is the area of the skydiver in m2. When in freefall, a skydiver of mass 95 kg has a drag coefficient of 1∙0 and a terminal velocity of 44 m s-1. The gravitational field strength is 9∙8 N kg-1 and the density of air is 1∙21 kg m-3. The area of the skydiver is A 0∙59 m2 B 0∙79 m2 C 0∙89 m2 D 4∙2 m2 E 35 m2. 8. A spacecraft is travelling at a constant speed relative to a nearby planet. A technician on the spacecraft measures the length of the spacecraft as 275 m. An observer on the planet measures the length of the spacecraft as 125 m. The speed of the spacecraft relative to the observer on the nearby planet is A 1·54 × 104 m s-1 B 2·22 × 108 m s-1 C 2·67 × 108 m s-1 D 3·00 × 108 m s-1 E 7·14 × 1016 m s-1. [Turn over

page 08 9. The redshift of a distant galaxy is 0·014. According to Hubble’s law, the distance of the galaxy from Earth is A 9·66 × 10-12 m B 1·83 × 1024 m C 1·30 × 1026 m D 9·32 × 1027 m E 6·33 × 1039 m. 10. A student makes the following statements about the Universe. I The force due to gravity acts against the expansion of the Universe. II Measurements show the rate of expansion of the Universe is increasing. III The mass of a galaxy can be estimated by the orbital speed of the stars within the galaxy. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I, II and III

page 09 11. An alpha particle is accelerated in an electric field between metal plates P and Q. − + alpha particle Q P The charge on the alpha particle is 3·2 × 10-19 C. The kinetic energy gained by the alpha particle while travelling from plate P to plate Q is 8·0 × 10-16 J. The potential difference across plates P and Q is A 2·6 × 10-34 V B 2·0 × 10-4 V C 4·0 × 10-4 V D 2·5 × 103 V E 5·0 × 103 V. [Turn over

page 10 12. An electron enters a region of uniform magnetic field as shown. region of magnetic field out of page electron The direction of the magnetic force on the electron immediately after entering the field is A towards the top of the page B towards the bottom of the page C towards the right of the page D into the page E out of the page.

page 11 13. A student makes the following statements about the Standard Model. I Every particle has an antiparticle. II Alpha decay is evidence for the existence of the neutrino. III The W-boson is associated with the strong nuclear force. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I and III only 14. A nucleus represented by 223 87Fr decays by beta emission. The symbol representing the nucleus formed as a result of this decay is A 224 87Fr B 222 87Fr C 223 88Ra D 223 86Rn E 224 88Ra. [Turn over

page 12 15. The diagram shows an experiment set up to investigate the photoelectric effect. The frequency of the incident radiation is varied and the current in the circuit is measured. vacuum A zinc plate incident radiation Which graph shows the relationship between the current I in the circuit and the frequency f of the incident radiation? E D C B A I I I I I 0 0 0 0 0 f f f f f

page 13 16. A photon of energy 6·40 × 10−19 J is incident on a metal plate. This causes photoemission to take place. The work function of the metal is 4·20 × 10−19 J. The maximum speed of the photoelectron is A 1·19 × 106 m s−1 B 9·60 × 105 m s−1 C 6·95 × 105 m s−1 D 6·79 × 105 m s−1 E 4·91 × 105 m s−1. 17. Waves from two coherent sources, S1 and S2, produce an interference pattern. Maxima are detected at the positions shown. maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum S2 S1 central maximum P The wavelength of the waves is 28 mm. For the third minimum at P the path difference (S2P - S1P) is A 42 mm B 56 mm C 70 mm D 84 mm E 98 mm. [Turn over

page 14 18. A ray of monochromatic light passes from air into water. The wavelength of this light in air is 589 nm. The speed of this light in water is A 2·56 × 102 m s−1 B 4·52 × 102 m s−1 C 2·26 × 108 m s−1 D 3·00 × 108 m s−1 E 3·99 × 108 m s−1. 19. When light passes through the outer layers of the Sun certain frequencies of light are absorbed by hydrogen atoms, producing dark lines in the spectrum. The diagram represents some of the energy levels for a hydrogen atom. E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 The number of absorption lines in the spectrum caused by the transition of electrons between these energy levels is A 4 B 6 C 9 D 10 E 20.

page 15 20. The output from an AC power supply is connected to an oscilloscope. The trace seen on the oscilloscope screen is shown. div div The Y-gain setting on the oscilloscope is 1·0 V/div. The rms voltage of the power supply is A 2·1 V B 3·0 V C 4·0 V D 4·2 V E 6·0 V. [Turn over

page 16 21. The output from a signal generator is connected to an oscilloscope. The trace observed on the oscilloscope screen is as shown in the diagram. The frequency of the signal from the signal generator is now doubled. The amplitude of the signal is unchanged. The Y-gain setting on the oscilloscope is unchanged. The timebase setting on the oscilloscope is changed from 1·0 ms/division to 0∙5 ms/division. Which of the following diagrams shows the trace that is now observed on the oscilloscope screen? D A E B C

page 17 22. A student sets up a circuit and measures the voltage across and the current in a resistor. The measurements and their uncertainties are voltage = (10∙0 ± 0∙1) V current = (0∙50 ± 0∙01) A The approximate absolute uncertainty in the calculated value of the resistance of the resistor is A ±0·11 Ω B ±0·2 Ω C ±0·4 Ω D ±1 Ω E ±2 Ω. 23. A circuit is set up as shown. 3·0 Ω 6·0 V 6·0 Ω − + The power supply has negligible internal resistance. The power dissipated in the 3∙0 Ω resistor is A 3∙0 W B 6∙0 W C 9∙0 W D 12 W E 18 W. [Turn over

page 18 24. A student connects four identical light emitting diodes (LEDs) to a 2 V DC supply as shown. P Q − + 2 V DC S R Which of the LEDs P, Q, R, and S will light? A P only B Q only C P and Q only D P and R only E Q and S only. 25. A student makes the following statements about uncertainties. I All measurements of physical quantities are liable to uncertainties. II Random uncertainties occur when a measurement is repeated and slight variations occur. III Systematic uncertainties in a quantity occur when measurements are either all smaller or all larger than the true value of the quantity. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B I and II only C I and III only D II and III only E I, II and III [END OF QUESTION PAPER] page 19 SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK page 20 SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK H FOR OFFICIAL USE Fill in these boxes and read what is printed below. Number of seat Town © Mark Full name of centre Forename(s) Surname Scottish candidate number Date of birth Year Day Month National Qualications 2019 Instructions for the completion of Paper 1 are given on page 02. Record your answers on the answer grid on page 03. Use blue or black ink. Before leaving the examination room you must give your answer booklet to the Invigilator; if you do not, you may lose all the marks for this paper. X857/76/02 WEDNESDAY, 15 MAY 9:00 AM – 9:45 AM Physics Paper 1 — Multiple choice Answer booklet A/PB page 02 The questions for Paper 1 are contained in the question paper X857/76/12. Read these and record your answers on the answer grid on page 03. Use blue or black ink. Do NOT use gel pens or pencil. 1. The answer to each question is either A, B, C, D or E. Decide what your answer is, then fill in the appropriate bubble (see sample question below). 2. There is only one correct answer to each question. 3. Any rough working should be done on the space for rough work at the end of the question paper X857/76/12. Sample question The energy unit measured by the electricity meter in your home is the A ampere B kilowatt-hour C watt D coulomb E volt. The correct answer is B — kilowatt-hour. The answer B bubble has been clearly filled in (see below). A B C D E Changing an answer If you decide to change your answer, cancel your first answer by putting a cross through it (see below) and fill in the answer you want. The answer below has been changed to D. A B C D E If you then decide to change back to an answer you have already scored out, put a tick (3) to the right of the answer you want, as shown below: A B C D E or A B C D E Paper 1 — 25 marks page 03 Paper 1 — Answer grid A B C D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Physics page 04 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE © National Qualications 2019 H X857/76/22 Physics Paper 1 — Relationships sheet WEDNESDAY, 15 MAY 9:00 AM – 9:45 AM A/PB page 02 d vt = s vt = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + W mg = F ma = 2 1 t t v c ′ = ⎛ ⎞ −⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ 2 1 v l l c ⎛ ⎞ ′ = −⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ observed rest rest λ λ z λ − = v z c = 0 v H d = 2 E mc = E hf = 0 k E hf hf = − 2 1 E E hf − = 1 T f = v fλ = sin d θ mλ = sin sin 1 2 θ n θ = sin sin 1 1 1 2 2 2 θ λ v θ λ v = = sin 1 cθ n = 2 k I d = P I A = , , ... mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = 1 2 or where 0 1 2 path difference − = max. value min. value random uncertainty number of values 2 peak rms V V = 2 peak rms I I = Q It = V IR = 2 2 V P IV I R R = = = ... T R R R = + + 1 2 ... T R R R = + + 1 2 1 1 1 E V Ir = + S R V V R R ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 V R V R = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV CV C = = = Q C V = W QV = , or w E Fd W Fd = = p E mgh = 2 1 2 k E mv = E P t = p mv = Ft mv mu = − 1 2 2 m m F G r = Relationships required for Physics Higher 2 2 1 1 2 2 I d I d = max min R R R n − Δ = or page 03 Additional relationships Circle Sphere Trigonometry circumference 2πr = 2 area πr = 2 area 4πr = 3 4 3 volume πr = sin opposite hypotenuse θ = cos adjacent hypotenuse θ = tan opposite adjacent θ = sin cos 2 2 1 θ θ + = page 04 Electron arrangements of elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides H FOR OFFICIAL USE Fill in these boxes and read what is printed below. Number of seat Town © Mark Full name of centre Forename(s) Surname Scottish candidate number Date of birth Year Day Month National Qualications 2019 Total marks — 130 Attempt ALL questions. You may use a calculator. Reference may be made to the data sheet on page 02 of this booklet and to the relationships sheet X857/76/11. Care should be taken to give an appropriate number of significant figures in the final answers to calculations. Write your answers clearly in the spaces provided in this booklet. Additional space for answers and rough work is provided at the end of this booklet. If you use this space you must clearly identify the question number you are attempting. Any rough work must be written in this booklet. Score through your rough work when you have written your final copy. Use blue or black ink. Before leaving the examination room you must give this booklet to the Invigilator; if you do not, you may lose all the marks for this paper. X857/76/01 WEDNESDAY, 15 MAY 10:15 AM – 12:30 PM A/PB Physics Paper 2 page 02 DATA SHEET COMMON PHYSICAL QUANTITIES Quantity Symbol Value Quantity Symbol Value Speed of light in vacuum c 3·00 × 108 m s−1 Planck’s constant h 6·63 × 10−34 J s Magnitude of the charge on an electron e 1·60 × 10−19 C Mass of electron me 9·11 × 10−31 kg Universal Constant of Gravitation G 6·67 × 10−11 m3 kg−1 s−2 Mass of neutron mn 1·675 × 10−27 kg Gravitational acceleration on Earth g 9·8 m s−2 Mass of proton mp 1·673 × 10−27 kg Hubble’s constant H0 2·3 × 10−18 s−1 REFRACTIVE INDICES The refractive indices refer to sodium light of wavelength 589 nm and to substances at a temperature of 273 K. Substance Refractive index Substance Refractive index Diamond 2·42 Water 1·33 Crown glass 1·50 Air 1·00 SPECTRAL LINES Element Wavelength/nm Colour Element Wavelength/nm Colour Hydrogen Sodium 656 486 434 410 397 389 589 Red Blue-green Blue-violet Violet Ultraviolet Ultraviolet Yellow Cadmium 644 509 480 Red Green Blue Lasers Element Wavelength/nm Colour Carbon dioxide Helium-neon 9550 10 590 633 Infrared Red PROPERTIES OF SELECTED MATERIALS Substance Density/kg m−3 Melting point/K Boiling point/K Aluminium Copper Ice Sea Water Water Air Hydrogen 2·70 × 103 8·96 × 103 9·20 × 102 1·02 × 103 1·00 × 103 1·29 9·0 × 10−2 933 1357 273 264 273 . . . . 14 2623 2853 . . . . 377 373 . . . . 20 The gas densities refer to a temperature of 273 K and a pressure of 1·01 × 105 Pa. } page 03 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 04 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN Total marks — 130 Attempt ALL questions 1. A student carries out an experiment with a tennis ball and a motion sensor connected to a laptop. laptop not to scale ball motion sensor The ball is released from rest below the sensor. The graph shows how the vertical velocity v of the ball varies with time t, from the moment the ball is released until it rebounds to its new maximum height. 0·77 4·0 0·50 −4·9 0 t (s) 1·18 v (m s−1) page 05 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (continued) (a) Using information from the graph (i) show that the initial acceleration of the ball is −9·8 m s−2 Space for working and answer (ii) determine the height from which the ball is released. Space for working and answer 2 3 [Turn over page 06 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (continued) (b) The mass of the ball is 57·0 g. (i) Determine the magnitude of the change in momentum of the ball during the bounce. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the magnitude of the average force exerted by the ball on the ground during the bounce. Space for working and answer 3 3 page 07 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 1. (continued) (c) Complete the sketch graph of acceleration a against time t for the ball, between 0 s and 1·18 s after it is released. Numerical values are not required on the acceleration axis. (An additional graph, if required, can be found on page 44) 0·77 0·50 1·18 0 t (s) a (m s−2) [Turn over 2 page 08 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. A student abseils down the outside of a building using a rope. W T not to scale X 15° The mass of the student is 55 kg. The rope, of negligible mass, is attached to a fixed point X at the top of the building. The rope makes an angle of 15° to the building. (a) Calculate the weight W of the student. Space for working and answer 3 page 09 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 2. (continued) (b) Determine the tension T in the rope. Space for working and answer (c) As the student abseils down the building the angle the rope makes with the building decreases. State whether the tension in the rope increases, decreases or stays the same. Justify your answer. [Turn over 3 2 page 10 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. A footballer tells teammates that a football can be kicked a much greater distance when the ball is initially travelling towards them, compared to kicking a stationary ball. Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this statement. 3 page 11 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 3. (continued) [Turn over page 12 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. A communications satellite orbits the Earth at a height of 36∙0 × 106 m above the surface of the Earth. not to scale satellite 36·0 × 106 m The mass of the Earth is 6·0 × 1024 kg and the radius of the Earth is 6·4 × 106 m. (a) Determine the distance between the centre of the Earth and the satellite. Space for working and answer (b) The gravitational force of attraction between the Earth and the satellite is 57 N. Calculate the mass of the satellite. Space for working and answer 1 3 page 13 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 4. (continued) (c) Determine the value of the Earth’s gravitational field strength g at the satellite. Space for working and answer (d) A second satellite has a quarter of the mass of the first satellite. The distance from the centre of the Earth to the second satellite is half the distance from the centre of the Earth to the first satellite. State how the gravitational force of attraction between the second satellite and the Earth compares to the gravitational force of attraction between the first satellite and the Earth. Justify your answer. 3 3 [Turn over page 14 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (a) A person is standing at the side of a road. A car travels along the road towards the person, at a constant speed of 12 m s-1. The car emits a sound of frequency 510 Hz. The person observes that the frequency of the sound heard changes as the car passes. (i) State the name given to this effect. (ii) Calculate the frequency of the sound heard by the person as the car approaches. The speed of sound in air is 340 m s-1. Space for working and answer 1 3 page 15 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 5. (continued) (b) This same effect is used to determine the speed of red blood cells through blood vessels. θ direction of blood flow blood vessel red blood cell probe not to scale Ultrasound waves are transmitted by a probe. The frequency of the ultrasound waves changes as they reflect from the blood cells. The probe detects the reflected waves. The velocity of the red blood cells can be determined using the following relationship 2 cos rbc f v θ f v Δ = where Δf is the change in frequency f is the transmitted frequency vrbc is the velocity of the red blood cells v is the velocity of the ultrasound θ is the angle between the direction of the waves and the direction of the blood flow. The frequency of the ultrasound transmitted by the probe is 3∙70 MHz. The velocity of the ultrasound is 1540 m s-1. During one test, the angle between the direction of the waves and blood flow is 60∙0°. The change in frequency of the ultrasound is 286 Hz. Calculate the velocity of the red blood cells during this test. Space for working and answer 2 [Turn over page 16 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. Stars emit radiation with a range of wavelengths. The peak wavelength of the radiation depends on the surface temperature of the star. (a) The graph shows how the energy emitted per second per unit area varies with the wavelength λ of the radiation for a star with a surface temperature of 5000 K. 0 energy emitted per second per unit area λ A second star has a surface temperature of 6000 K. On the graph above, add a line to show how the energy emitted per second per unit area varies with the wavelength λ of the radiation for the second star. (An additional graph, if required, can be found on page 44) 2 page 17 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 6. (continued) (b) The table gives the surface temperature T, in kelvin, of four different stars and the peak wavelength λpeak of radiation emitted from each star. T (K) λpeak (m) 7700 3·76 × 10-7 8500 3·42 × 10-7 9600 3·01 × 10-7 12 000 2·42 × 10-7 Use all the data in the table to show that the relationship between the surface temperature T of a star and the peak wavelength λpeak radiated from the star is 3 2 9 10 peak T λ − ⋅× = Space for working and answer [Turn over 3 page 18 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. Scientists have recently discovered a type of particle called a pentaquark. Pentaquarks are very short lived and contain five quarks. A lambda b (Λb) pentaquark contains the following quarks: 2 up, 1 down, 1 charm, and 1 anticharm quark. (a) Quarks and leptons are fundamental particles. (i) Explain what is meant by the term fundamental particle. (ii) State the name given to the group of matter particles that contains quarks and leptons. (b) The table contains information about the charge on the quarks that make up the Λb pentaquark. Type of quark Charge up 2 3 e + down 1 3 e − charm e + 2 3 anticharm e −2 3 Determine the total charge on the Λb pentaquark. Space for working and answer 1 1 2 page 19 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (c) One theory to explain the structure of the Λb pentaquark suggests that three of the quarks group together and one quark and the antiquark group together within the pentaquark. Λb antiquark quarks (i) State the type of particle that is made of a quark-antiquark pair. (ii) The mean lifetime of another quark-antiquark pair is 8·0 × 10-21 s in its own frame of reference. During an experiment the quark-antiquark pair is travelling with a velocity of 0·91c relative to a stationary observer. Calculate the mean lifetime of this quark-antiquark pair relative to the stationary observer. Space for working and answer 1 3 [Turn over page 20 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 7. (continued) (d) The Λb pentaquark has a mass-energy equivalence of 4450 MeV. One eV is equal to 1∙60 × 10-19 J. (i) Determine the energy, in joules, of the Λb pentaquark. Space for working and answer (ii) Calculate the mass of the Λb pentaquark. Space for working and answer 1 3 page 21 [Turn over for next question DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 22 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. The Sun emits energy at an average rate of 4·1 × 1026 J s-1. This energy is produced by nuclear reactions taking place inside the Sun. The following statement shows one reaction that takes place inside the Sun. 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 0 H H He n + → + (a) State the name given to this type of nuclear reaction. (b) The mass of the particles involved in this reaction are shown in the table. Particle Mass (kg) 2 1H 3·3436 × 10-27 3 2He 5·0082 × 10-27 1 0n 1·6749 × 10-27 Determine the energy released in this reaction. Space for working and answer 1 4 page 23 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 8. (continued) (c) Determine the number of these reactions that would be required per second to produce the Sun’s average energy output. Space for working and answer [Turn over 2 page 24 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. A laser emits light when electrons are stimulated to fall from a high energy level to a lower energy level. The diagram shows some of the energy levels involved. In one particular laser, a photon is produced by the electron transition from E5 to E3 as shown. E0 −2·976 × 10−18 J E1 E4 E2 E3 E5 −3·290 × 10−18 J (a) (i) Determine the wavelength of the photon emitted. Space for working and answer 4 page 25 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 9. (a) (continued) (ii) The laser beam is shone onto a screen. The beam produces a spot of diameter 8·00 × 10-4 m. 8·00 × 10−4 m spot of laser light The irradiance of the spot of light on the screen is 9950 W m-2. Determine the power of the laser beam. Space for working and answer (b) A student investigates how irradiance I varies with distance d from a point source of light, using the apparatus shown. bench covered with black cloth metre stick light meter light sensor small lamp Describe how this apparatus could be used to verify the inverse square law for a point source of light. 4 3 [Turn over page 26 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. A student carries out an experiment to investigate the effect of a grating on beams of light from three different lasers. first order maximum central maximum grating screen not to scale laser θ The three different lasers produce red, green and blue light respectively. Each laser beam is directed in turn towards the grating. The grating has a slit separation of 3·3 × 10-6 m. (a) State which of these three colours of laser light would produce the smallest angle θ between the central maximum and the first order maximum. Justify your answer. 3 page 27 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 10. (continued) (b) The angle θ between the central maximum and the first order maximum for light from one of the lasers is 8·9°. (i) Calculate the wavelength of this light. Space for working and answer (ii) Determine the colour of the light from this laser. (iii) Another student suggests that a more accurate value for the wavelength of this laser light can be found if a grating with a slit separation of 5·0 × 10-6 m is used. Explain why this suggestion is incorrect. [Turn over 3 1 2 page 28 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. Diamonds sparkle because light that enters the diamond is reflected back to an observer. θ 49·0° diamond air (a) A ray of monochromatic light is incident on a diamond at an angle of 49∙0°. The refractive index of diamond for this light is 2·42. Calculate the angle of refraction θ. Space for working and answer (b) Calculate the critical angle of the diamond for this light. Space for working and answer 3 3 page 29 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 11. (continued) (c) Moissanite is a transparent material with a greater refractive index than diamond. A sample of moissanite is made into the same shape as the diamond. State whether the sample of moissanite sparkles more or less than the diamond. You must justify your answer. [Turn over 3 page 30 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (a) A student sets up the circuit shown. S A V E r R When switch S is open the reading on the voltmeter is 1∙5 V. Switch S is now closed. The reading on the voltmeter is now 1∙3 V and the reading on the ammeter is 0∙88 A. (i) State the EMF E of the cell. (ii) Calculate the internal resistance r of the cell. Space for working and answer (iii) Explain why the reading on the voltmeter decreases when the switch is closed. 1 3 2 page 31 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 12. (continued) (b) A battery of EMF 9∙0 V and internal resistance 1∙2 Ω is connected in series with a lamp. The lamp has a resistance of 2∙4 Ω. A V 2·4 Ω 9·0 V 1·2 Ω (i) Determine the current in the lamp. Space for working and answer (ii) Calculate the power dissipated in the lamp. Space for working and answer 3 3 [Turn over page 32 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. A student investigates the charging of a capacitor. The student sets up the circuit as shown using a 47 µF capacitor. − + laptop interface 0 – 12 V 47 µF S R The capacitor is initially uncharged. The switch S is now closed. A laptop connected to an interface displays a graph of current against time as the capacitor charges. (a) The variable voltage supply is set at 6∙0 V. Calculate the maximum charge stored by the capacitor. Space for working and answer 3 page 33 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. (continued) (b) The graph shows how the current I varies with time t as the capacitor charges. 0 I t Switch S is opened, and the capacitor is discharged. The resistor is now replaced with one that has a greater resistance. Switch S is again closed and the capacitor charges. Add a line to the graph above to show how the current now varies with time as the capacitor charges. (An additional graph, if required, can be found on page 45.) (c) Suggest an alteration the student could make to this circuit to increase the maximum energy stored by the 47 µF capacitor. [Turn over 2 1 page 34 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. (continued) (d) The use of analogies from everyday life can help improve the understanding of physics concepts. Vehicles using a car park may be taken as an analogy for the charging of a capacitor. speed bump Use your knowledge of physics to comment on this analogy. 3 page 35 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 13. (d) (continued) [Turn over page 36 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. Solids can be categorised as conductors, insulators or semiconductors depending on their ability to conduct electricity. Their electrical conductivity can be explained using band theory. The diagrams show the valence and conduction bands of three solids X, Y and Z. One represents a conductor, one represents an insulator and one represents a semiconductor. valence band solid Z conduction band valence band solid Y conduction band conduction band energy of electrons valence band solid X (a) Complete the table to show which solid represents a conductor, an insulator and a semiconductor. Solid Category X Y Z 1 page 37 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 14. (continued) (b) Using band theory, explain why conduction can take place in a semiconductor at room temperature. (c) Silicon can be doped with arsenic to produce an n-type semiconductor. State the effect that doping has on the conductivity of silicon. (d) Resistivity is a measure of a material’s property to oppose the flow of charge. The resistivity of silicon is 2∙3 × 103 Ω m. The resistivity of copper is 1∙7 × 10-8 Ω m. Compare the resistivity of silicon to the resistivity of copper in terms of orders of magnitude. Space for working and answer 2 1 2 [Turn over page 38 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE page 39 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. A 1·00 m long wooden rod has a series of small holes drilled at 10 mm intervals along its length. The rod is hung on a horizontal pin passing through a hole 50 mm from one end. not to scale pin A B The rod is then raised through a small angle and released. The period T is the time for the rod to travel from A to B and back to A. (a) Describe a method to obtain an accurate value for the period T using only a stopwatch. 2 [Turn over page 40 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. (continued) (b) The rod is hung from different holes in turn, and the distance h from the pin to the midpoint of the rod is recorded. T is determined for each value of h. The results are shown in the table. h (m) T (s) 0·45 1·60 0·40 1·56 0·35 1·54 0·30 1·53 0·25 1·53 0·22 1·55 0·20 1·58 (i) Using the square-ruled paper on page 41, draw a graph of T against h. (ii) Using your graph, state the two values of h that produce a period of 1·57 s. (iii) (A) Using your graph, estimate the minimum period T. (B) Suggest an improvement to the experimental procedure that would allow a more precise value for the minimum period T to be determined. 3 1 1 1 page 41 [Turn over for next question page 42 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN 15. (continued) (c) The quantities T and h are related by the relationship 2 2 2 4π h T h C g = + where g is the gravitational field strength and C is a constant. Use data from the table on page 40 to calculate a value for C when h is 0∙30 m. A unit is not required. Space for working and answer [END OF QUESTION PAPER] 2 page 43 page 44 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional graph for use with Question 1 (c) 0·77 0·50 1·18 0 t (s) a (m s−2) Additional graph for use with Question 6 (a) 0 energy emitted per second per unit area λ page 45 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK Additional graph for use with Question 13 (b) 0 I t page 46 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK page 47 MARKS DO NOT WRITE IN THIS MARGIN ADDITIONAL SPACE FOR ANSWERS AND ROUGH WORK page 48 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE © National Qualications 2019 H X857/76/11 Physics Paper 2 — Relationships sheet WEDNESDAY, 15 MAY 10:15 AM – 12:30 PM A/PB page 02 d vt = s vt = v u at = + 2 1 2 s ut at = + 2 2 2 v u as = + ( ) 1 2 s u v t = + W mg = F ma = 2 1 t t v c ′ = ⎛ ⎞ −⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ 2 1 v l l c ⎛ ⎞ ′ = −⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ o s s v f f v v ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ± ⎝ ⎠ observed rest rest λ λ z λ − = v z c = 0 v H d = 2 E mc = E hf = 0 k E hf hf = − 2 1 E E hf − = 1 T f = v fλ = sin d θ mλ = sin sin 1 2 θ n θ = sin sin 1 1 1 2 2 2 θ λ v θ λ v = = sin 1 cθ n = 2 k I d = P I A = , , ... mλ m λ m ⎛ ⎞ = + ⎜ ⎟ ⎝ ⎠ = 1 2 or where 0 1 2 path difference − = max. value min. value random uncertainty number of values 2 peak rms V V = 2 peak rms I I = Q It = V IR = 2 2 V P IV I R R = = = ... T R R R = + + 1 2 ... T R R R = + + 1 2 1 1 1 E V Ir = + S R V V R R ⎛ ⎞ = ⎜ ⎟ ⎜ ⎟ + ⎝ ⎠ 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 V R V R = 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 Q E QV CV C = = = Q C V = W QV = , or w E Fd W Fd = = p E mgh = 2 1 2 k E mv = E P t = p mv = Ft mv mu = − 1 2 2 m m F G r = Relationships required for Physics Higher 2 2 1 1 2 2 I d I d = max min R R R n − Δ = or page 03 Additional relationships Circle Sphere Trigonometry circumference 2πr = 2 area πr = 2 area 4πr = 3 4 3 volume πr = sin opposite hypotenuse θ = cos adjacent hypotenuse θ = tan opposite adjacent θ = sin cos 2 2 1 θ θ + = page 04 Electron arrangements of elements Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 0 (1) (18) 1 H 1 Hydrogen Key Atomic number Symbol Electron arrangement Name 2 He 2 Helium (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (2) 3 Li 2,1 Lithium 4 Be 2,2 Beryllium 5 B 2,3 Boron 6 C 2,4 Carbon 7 N 2,5 Nitrogen 8 O 2,6 Oxygen 9 F 2,7 Fluorine 10 Ne 2,8 Neon 11 Na 2,8,1 Sodium 12 Mg 2,8,2 Magnesium Transition elements 13 Al 2,8,3 Aluminium 14 Si 2,8,4 Silicon 15 P 2,8,5 Phosphorus 16 S 2,8,6 Sulfur 17 Cl 2,8,7 Chlorine 18 Ar 2,8,8 Argon (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 19 K 2,8,8,1 Potassium 20 Ca 2,8,8,2 Calcium 21 Sc 2,8,9,2 Scandium 22 Ti 2,8,10,2 Titanium 23 V 2,8,11,2 Vanadium 24 Cr 2,8,13,1 Chromium 25 Mn 2,8,13,2 Manganese 26 Fe 2,8,14,2 Iron 27 Co 2,8,15,2 Cobalt 28 Ni 2,8,16,2 Nickel 29 Cu 2,8,18,1 Copper 30 Zn 2,8,18,2 Zinc 31 Ga 2,8,18,3 Gallium 32 Ge 2,8,18,4 Germanium 33 As 2,8,18,5 Arsenic 34 Se 2,8,18,6 Selenium 35 Br 2,8,18,7 Bromine 36 Kr 2,8,18,8 Krypton 37 Rb 2,8,18,8,1 Rubidium 38 Sr 2,8,18,8,2 Strontium 39 Y 2,8,18,9,2 Yttrium 40 Zr 2,8,18, 10,2 Zirconium 41 Nb 2,8,18, 12,1 Niobium 42 Mo 2,8,18,13, 1 Molybdenum 43 Tc 2,8,18,13, 2 Technetium 44 Ru 2,8,18,15, 1 Ruthenium 45 Rh 2,8,18,16, 1 Rhodium 46 Pd 2,8,18, 18,0 Palladium 47 Ag 2,8,18, 18,1 Silver 48 Cd 2,8,18, 18,2 Cadmium 49 In 2,8,18, 18,3 Indium 50 Sn 2,8,18, 18,4 Tin 51 Sb 2,8,18, 18,5 Antimony 52 Te 2,8,18, 18,6 Tellurium 53 I 2,8,18, 18,7 Iodine 54 Xe 2,8,18, 18,8 Xenon 55 Cs 2,8,18,18, 8,1 Caesium 56 Ba 2,8,18,18, 8,2 Barium 57 La 2,8,18,18, 9,2 Lanthanum 72 Hf 2,8,18,32, 10,2 Hafnium 73 Ta 2,8,18, 32,11,2 Tantalum 74 W 2,8,18,32, 12,2 Tungsten 75 Re 2,8,18,32, 13,2 Rhenium 76 Os 2,8,18,32, 14,2 Osmium 77 Ir 2,8,18,32, 15,2 Iridium 78 Pt 2,8,18,32, 17,1 Platinum 79 Au 2,8,18, 32,18,1 Gold 80 Hg 2,8,18, 32,18,2 Mercury 81 Tl 2,8,18, 32,18,3 Thallium 82 Pb 2,8,18, 32,18,4 Lead 83 Bi 2,8,18, 32,18,5 Bismuth 84 Po 2,8,18, 32,18,6 Polonium 85 At 2,8,18, 32,18,7 Astatine 86 Rn 2,8,18, 32,18,8 Radon 87 Fr 2,8,18,32, 18,8,1 Francium 88 Ra 2,8,18,32, 18,8,2 Radium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 104 Rf 2,8,18,32, 32,10,2 Rutherfordium 105 Db 2,8,18,32, 32,11,2 Dubnium 106 Sg 2,8,18,32, 32,12,2 Seaborgium 107 Bh 2,8,18,32, 32,13,2 Bohrium 108 Hs 2,8,18,32, 32,14,2 Hassium 109 Mt 2,8,18,32, 32,15,2 Meitnerium 110 Ds 2,8,18,32, 32,17,1 Darmstadtium 111 Rg 2,8,18,32, 32,18,1 Roentgenium 112 Cn 2,8,18,32, 32,18,2 Copernicium 57 La 2,8,18, 18,9,2 Lanthanum 58 Ce 2,8,18, 20,8,2 Cerium 59 Pr 2,8,18,21, 8,2 Praseodymium 60 Nd 2,8,18,22, 8,2 Neodymium 61 Pm 2,8,18,23, 8,2 Promethium 62 Sm 2,8,18,24, 8,2 Samarium 63 Eu 2,8,18,25, 8,2 Europium 64 Gd 2,8,18,25, 9,2 Gadolinium 65 Tb 2,8,18,27, 8,2 Terbium 66 Dy 2,8,18,28, 8,2 Dysprosium 67 Ho 2,8,18,29, 8,2 Holmium 68 Er 2,8,18,30, 8,2 Erbium 69 Tm 2,8,18,31, 8,2 Thulium 70 Yb 2,8,18,32, 8,2 Ytterbium 71 Lu 2,8,18,32, 9,2 Lutetium 89 Ac 2,8,18,32, 18,9,2 Actinium 90 Th 2,8,18,32, 18,10,2 Thorium 91 Pa 2,8,18,32, 20,9,2 Protactinium 92 U 2,8,18,32, 21,9,2 Uranium 93 Np 2,8,18,32, 22,9,2 Neptunium 94 Pu 2,8,18,32, 24,8,2 Plutonium 95 Am 2,8,18,32, 25,8,2 Americium 96 Cm 2,8,18,32, 25,9,2 Curium 97 Bk 2,8,18,32, 27,8,2 Berkelium 98 Cf 2,8,18,32, 28,8,2 Californium 99 Es 2,8,18,32, 29,8,2 Einsteinium 100 Fm 2,8,18,32, 30,8,2 Fermium 101 Md 2,8,18,32, 31,8,2 Mendelevium 102 No 2,8,18,32, 32,8,2 Nobelium 103 Lr 2,8,18,32, 32,9,2 Lawrencium Lanthanides Actinides

3 Turn over 3 A light source radiates a power P onto a surface, covering a circular area of radius r. Which of the following is the correct expression for the intensity I of the radiation at the surface? A I = 2 P πr B I = Pπr 2 C I =  2 P πr D I = 2Pπr (Total for Question 3 = 1 mark) 4 A string is held under tension. When it is plucked it vibrates with a frequency f. Which of the following would result in a lower value for f ? A decreasing the cross-sectional area of the string B decreasing the density of the material of the string C increasing the length of the string D increasing the tension (Total for Question 4 = 1 mark) 5 The image shows a diffraction pattern observed when a beam of electrons is fired at thin gold foil. (Source: © The Reading Room/Alamy Stock Photo) What property of electrons does this observation demonstrate? A they exist in discrete energy levels B they have a negative charge C their small mass D their wave nature (Total for Question 5 = 1 mark)

4 6 A longitudinal wave is represented on a displacement-distance graph. A positive displacement on the graph indicates a displacement to the right. Which graph shows the correct labelling of possible positions of a compression, C, and a rarefaction, R? A displacement distance 0 C R B displacement distance 0 C R C displacement distance 0 C R D displacement distance 0 C R A B C D (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark)

5 Turn over 7 An electron travels at a velocity v. Which of the following is the correct expression for the de Broglie wavelength λ of the electron? A λ = 3 00 10 9 11 10 8 31 . . × × × − v B λ =  9 11 10 3 00 10 31 8 . . × × × − v C λ = 6 63 10 9 11 10 34 31 . . × × × − − v D λ =  9 11 10 6 63 10 31 34 . . × × × − − v (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 In an experiment to determine the wavelength of light, three values for the wavelength are obtained and the mean value calculated. Wavelength / nm 466 448 473 Mean wavelength / nm 462 What is the uncertainty, in nm, in these results? A 25 B 18 C 14 D 11 (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

6 9 The light emitted from a laptop screen is plane polarised. Explain how the plane of polarisation of the emitted light can be demonstrated using a polarising filter. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 9 = 3 marks)

7 Turn over 10 A student carries out an investigation to measure the Young modulus of the material of a wire. He clamps one end of the wire and passes the other end over a pulley as shown. G-clamp masses pulley marker metre rule wire wooden blocks The student measures the length and diameter of the wire. He hangs masses from the free end of the wire and completes a table with values of mass and extension. Describe how the data collected should be used to determine the Young modulus using a graphical method. Your answer should include a sketch of the expected graph. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 10 = 4 marks)

8 11 Light can be modelled as a wave. (a) Describe how light is transmitted as a transverse wave. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Diffraction provides evidence for the wave nature of light. Use Huygens' construction to describe what happens to light waves after passing through a narrow gap. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 5 marks) 9 Turn over BLANK PAGE

10 12 In a conical spring the diameter of the coils increases over its length. The spring can be designed so that each coil fits into the inner diameter of the next coil so they take up minimal space when fully compressed. (Source: © Anatolii Riabokon/Alamy Stock Vector) A conical spring is compressed against a flat surface. The graph shows the force‑displacement graph for the spring as the compression force increases from 0 N to the point when the spring is fully compressed. 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 0 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Displacement / mm Force / N The spring obeys Hooke’s law for small compression forces. (a) Determine a value for the spring constant of the spring for compression forces up to 60 N. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Spring constant = ....................................................... 11 Turn over (b) The compression force is increased from 60 N to 220 N. Determine a value for the additional energy stored in the spring due to this increase in force. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Additional energy = ....................................................... (c) When fully compressed all the coils lie flat inside each other. h d unloaded fully compressed The height h of the spring when unloaded is 126 mm. Calculate the diameter d of the wire in the spring. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Diameter = ....................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 7 marks)

12 13 Spacecraft in orbit will be exposed to ultraviolet radiation from the Sun. Due to the photoelectric effect they can become charged. (a) Scientists have observed that one such spacecraft becomes charged when the frequency of the radiation is greater than 9.9 × 1014 Hz. The table lists the work function of some metals. metal Work function eV aluminium 4.1 caesium 2.1 nickel 5.0 platinum 3.3 Deduce the metal that covers the outside of the spacecraft. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Turn over *(b) The graph shows how the intensity of ultraviolet radiation varies with height above the surface of the Earth. 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 Height (km) Intensity of ultraviolet radiation / W m−2 (Source: semanticscholar.org) An aeroplane made of the same metal as the spacecraft is flying at a height of 10 km. Explain why the aeroplane charges at a slower rate than the spacecraft due to the photoelectric effect. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 10 marks)

14 14 In an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air, a powder is sprinkled over the base of a horizontal glass tube. One end of the tube is closed. A sound source is placed at the open end of the tube, as shown. sound source 0.50 m tube piles of powder Soundwaves travel along the tube and reflect from the closed end. (a) Explain why the powder forms into small piles at regular intervals along the length of the tube. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) When the frequency of the source is 1.8 kHz the positions of six piles and the distance they cover is 0.50 m, as shown on the diagram. Calculate a value for the speed of sound. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed = ....................................................... (Total for Question 14 = 8 marks)

15 Turn over 15 A magnifying glass consists of a converging lens and is used to magnify the details of an object. A biologist is studying a flower using a magnifying glass. The anther of the flower has a width of 0.2 mm. The magnifying glass is placed 5.0 cm from the flower and an image of the anther is produced that is 3.5 mm wide. (a) Calculate the power of the lens in the magnifying glass. (5) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Power of lens = ....................................................... 16 (b) The biologist notices coloured fringes around the edges of the image. This is caused by different coloured light being refracted by different angles as it passes through the lens. white light blue red white light red blue The refractive index of red and blue light as the light passes from glass into air can be investigated using a 20° glass prism. white light blue light red light 20° Not to scale A ray of white light is incident along the normal and passes straight into the prism. Blue and red light rays are refracted by different angles as they leave the prism. The angles of refraction are measured using a protractor, like the one shown. 180 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 17 Turn over (i) Deduce whether the measurements made using the protractor are sufficient to measure the difference in the angles of refraction between blue and red light. refractive index of red light in glass = 1.509 refractive index of blue light in glass = 1.517 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The angle of incidence at the glass-air interface can be changed by altering the path of the light as it enters the prism. The angle of incidence of the red light at the glass-air interface is changed to 35°. Deduce whether the red light will still be refracted at the glass-air boundary. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 15 = 11 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION A = 56 MARKS

18 SECTION B Answer ALL questions. 16 Read the passage and answer the questions that follow. Atoms can be promoted into an excited state when they absorb energy. This results in the release of radiation at a random time. When several atoms are close together a quantum effect can occur. When one atom emits radiation this affects all the other nearby excited atoms. The excess energy of many of the atoms is released simultaneously and an intense flash of light is produced. This effect is called superradiance and can be used to produce lasers that emit a narrower range of frequencies than conventional lasers. (a) When superradiance occurs the atoms all absorb the same amount of energy. Explain how this results in all the atoms emitting radiation of a particular frequency. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 19 Turn over (b) Superradiance occurs when the distance between atoms is less than the wavelength of the emitted radiation. An atom is in the ground state. The atom absorbs 6.2 eV of energy. The distance between neighbouring atoms is 140 nm. Deduce whether superradiance can occur. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) Superradiant lasers are highly monochromatic. Explain why a monochromatic light source is important in diffraction experiments. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 16 = 11 marks)

20 17 Weather stations monitor the position of storm clouds. (a) A microwave pulse is emitted from a transducer at a weather station. The pulse reflects from a storm cloud and is detected at the same transducer 340 µs later. Calculate the distance between the storm cloud and the weather station. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Distance = ....................................................... 21 Turn over (b) The movement of a storm cloud is monitored by two weather stations. The components of the velocity of the storm cloud towards each weather station are shown in the diagram. N Weather station 1 Weather station 2 9 m s−1 12 m s−1 Not to scale Determine the velocity of the storm cloud. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Magnitude of velocity = ....................................................... Direction of velocity = ....................................................... 22 (c) (i) A raindrop is falling vertically through the air. The free-body force diagram shows the forces acting on the raindrop. Diagram NOT drawn to scale viscous drag upthrust weight The raindrop is travelling at terminal velocity. The raindrop is spherical with a radius of 0.10 mm and a weight of 4.1 × 10−8 N . Calculate the magnitude of the terminal velocity. viscosity of air = 1.3 × 10−5 Pa s density of air = 1.2 kg m−3 (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Magnitude of terminal velocity = ....................................................... 23 (ii) The value of terminal velocity calculated using the data in (c)(i) is greater than the actual terminal velocity of the raindrop. Explain why the calculation in (c)(i) may not be valid. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 17 = 13 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION B = 24 MARKS TOTAL FOR PAPER = 80 MARKS 24 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s–2 (close to Earth’s surface) Electron charge e = –1.60 × 10–19C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10–31kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19J Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg–1 (close to Earth’s surface) Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34J s Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108m s–1 Mechanics Electricity Potential difference V W Q = Resistance R V I = Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P V R = 2 W = VIt Resistivity ρl R A = Current I Q t = ∆ ∆ I = nqvA Kinematic equations of motion s u v t = + ( ) 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ΣF = ma g F m = W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P E t = P W t = efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency = useful power output total power input 25 Materials Waves and Particle Nature of Light Wave speed v = fλ Speed of a transverse wave on a string T v μ = Intensity of radiation I P A = Power of a lens P f = 1 P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u + = 1 1 v f Magnification for a lens m v u = = image height object height Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n c v = Critical angle sin C n = 1 Photon model E = hf Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + ½mv 2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p Density m ρ V = Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔx Young modulus Stress F σ A = Δ Strain x ε x = σ E ε = Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔx 26 BLANK PAGE 27 BLANK PAGE 28 BLANK PAGE

3 Turn over 4 Which of the following is a base SI unit? A ampere B coulomb C joule D newton (Total for Question 4 = 1 mark) 5 A high-energy proton can interact with a photon to produce two particles. Which of the following could be the two particles produced? A n + π 0 B n + π+ C π 0 + π+ D π− + π+ (Total for Question 5 = 1 mark)

4 6 The graph shows how an electric potential V varies with distance x. V x Which of the following shows the corresponding variation of electric field strength E with x? E 0 x E 0 x A B E 0 x E 0 x C D (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark)

5 Turn over 7 The intensity of light incident on a light dependent resistor (LDR) can vary both its electrical resistance R and the number of charge carriers per unit volume n. The light intensity on an LDR is increased. Which row of the table describes the effect on R and n? R n A decreases decreases B decreases increases C increases decreases D increases increases (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 A proton has a mass of 1.67 × 10 −27 kg. Which of the following shows the conversion of this mass to GeV/c2 ? A 1 67 10 1 60 10 3 00 10 27 10 8 2 . . ( . ) × × × × − − B 1 67 10 1 60 10 3 00 10 27 19 8 2 . . ( . ) × × × × − − C 1 67 10 3 00 10 1 60 10 27 8 2 10 . ( . ) . D 1 67 10 1 60 10 3 00 10 27 10 8 2 . . ( . ) (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark) 9 The blade of a lawnmower rotates at a speed of 50 revolutions per second. Which of the following is the angular speed of the blade in rads s−1? A 7.96 B 15.9 C 157 D 314 (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark)

6 10 Two gliders, X and Y, are placed on an air track. The gliders are pushed towards each other as shown. 2.0 m s−1 1.0 m s−1 mass of X = 0.5 kg mass of Y = 1.0 kg X Y The gliders collide and continue to move after the collision. Which row of the table could show the velocities of X and Y, in m s−1, after the collision? X Y A − 1.0 0.5 B − 1.0 − 0.5 C − 2.0 − 1.0 D − 2.0 2.0 (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark)

7 Turn over 11 A uniform paving slab is to be used as a garden step. (a) State what is meant by the centre of gravity of an extended body. . (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The paving slab has a weight of 310 N and a length of 90 cm and will be supported at two points, P and Q, as shown. The distance between P and Q will be 75 cm. Q 75 cm P 90 cm end of slab This might be unsafe because a person who places all their weight at the end of the slab might tip the slab. A person of mass 70 kg stands at the end of the slab. Deduce whether the slab will tip. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 5 marks)

8 12 Analogue ammeters were used before digital meters became widely available. The analogue ammeter shown will measure a maximum current of 1.0 mA and has a resistance of 18 Ω. 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 0.2 0 (Source: © David J. Green/Alamy Stock Photo) The analogue ammeter can be adapted to measure a larger current by adding a resistor, known as a shunt, in parallel with the ammeter. The arrangement is shown below. The analogue ammeter is represented by the 18 Ω resistor. 2.0 A 18 Ω shunt The maximum current through the 18 Ω resistor remains as 1.0 mA. (a) Show that the shunt would need to have a resistance of about 0.01 Ω to adapt this ammeter to read up to a maximum current of 2.0 A. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9 Turn over (b) A shunt of this resistance was usually made from Manganin wire. Calculate the length of Manganin wire of radius 0.95 mm required to make this shunt. resistivity of Manganin = 4.55 × 10−7 Ω m (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Length = ...................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 6 marks)

10 13 The photograph shows a model racing car set. The curved parts of the track are semicircular. The car makes electrical contact with the track using metal brushes underneath the car. (a) There is a maximum speed for the car to stay on the curved part of the track. Explain why the car will slip off the curved part of the track if the car exceeds the maximum speed. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The following measurements are made for a car starting at rest on a straight piece of track. distance travelled = 1.2 m time taken = 0.77 s (i) Show that the final velocity of the car is about 3 m s−1. Assume the acceleration is constant. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Turn over (ii) The final velocity calculated in (b)(i) is the maximum velocity before the car slips off the track. Calculate the maximum horizontal force between the curved part of the track and the car. mass of car = 0.050 kg radius of curved part of track = 0.042 m (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Maximum horizontal force = ...................................................... (c) The cars are controlled separately and so can be raced, with one car on the inner lane and the other on the outer lane. The cars are identical. Each car is raced at its highest speed for that lane. Explain why the outcome of the race is difficult to predict. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 10 marks)

12 14 The diagram shows a model used to demonstrate alpha particle scattering. A ball bearing is set rolling on a wooden track. The track is positioned so that the ball bearing rolls onto a metal sheet with a curved surface known as a ʻhillʼ. hill ball bearing wooden track The diagram shows a vertical cross-section through the hill. The surface is curved so that the height of a point h on the curved surface is inversely proportional to the distance r from the centre of the hill. r h 13 Turn over (a) Explain why the hill is suitable as a model for the electric field surrounding the nucleus of an atom. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) A plan view of the arrangement is shown. hill ball bearing wooden track The wooden track is moved to different positions and the ball bearing is released. Describe the results of the alpha particle scattering experiment and how these can be demonstrated by moving the wooden track to different positions. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 7 marks)

14 15 The properties of capacitors make them useful in timing circuits. The following circuit is used to provide an input Y to an integrated circuit. 8.0 V 0 V Y integrated circuit C = 1.5 μF S2 R2 = 2.7 kΩ S1 R1 = 3.3 kΩ (a) Initially the capacitor is uncharged. The switch S1 is closed. Sketch a graph to show how the potential at point Y varies with time. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Potential / V 10 20 30 Time / ms 15 Turn over (b) When the potential at Y is 8.0 V, the switch S2 is closed. (i) Calculate the time taken for the potential at Y to decrease to 2.0 V. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Time taken = ...................................................... (ii) Calculate the energy stored on the capacitor when the potential at Y is 2.0 V. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Energy stored = ...................................................... (c) When the potential at Y is 2.0 V, the switch S2 is opened. Calculate the power dissipated by the resistance R1 when the potential at Y is 2.0 V. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Power dissipated = ...................................................... (Total for Question 15 = 11 marks)

16 16 Scientists have been studying a type of jumping spider that can jump up to six times its body length. (a) The scientists photographed a spider at 0.02s intervals, during a jump. The picture is taken from the photograph and is shown actual size. platform (i) Deduce whether the images show that the motion in the x-direction is independent of the motion in the y-direction. You should take measurements using the cross marking the centre of gravity of the spider. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Turn over (ii) Show that the initial velocity of the spider at the start of the jump is about 1 m s−1. You should take measurements using the cross marking the centre of gravity of the spider. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (iii) The spider achieves this jump by extending its two back legs by 3.0 mm. Calculate the average force the spider exerts in each leg to achieve the jump. mass of spider = 150 mg (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Average force = ...................................................... 18 (b) Just as the spider starts the jump, it fixes a silk thread to the platform. It is thought that the thread acts as a safety line in case the spider falls. silk thread platform A student makes the comment: ʻIf the silk thread can withstand a tension equal to the weight of the spider then this safety system should work.ʼ Deduce whether this statement is correct. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 16 = 14 marks) 19 Turn over BLANK PAGE

20 17 Hybrid electric vehicles (HEV) use the same device both as a generator to charge the car battery and as an electric motor to support the propulsion system. A simplified diagram of the device is shown. The coil can rotate freely around the axis. magnet magnet S N axis coil *(a) Describe how the device can be used as both a generator and an electric motor. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 21 Turn over (b) The circuit diagram shows a car battery connected to an electric motor for a HEV. The battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) 180 V and internal resistance 0.036 Ω. 180 V I M 0.036 Ω The motor has a maximum power of 88 kW. (i) Show that the current I drawn by the electric motor when operating at this power would be given by the equation 0.036I 2 − 180I + 88 000 = 0 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Solving the equation above produces an answer of I = 550 A. At maximum power, the car can accelerate from rest to sixty miles per hour in under 7 s. The maximum charge capacity of the battery within this HEV is 6.1 amp-hour. Deduce whether the battery could maintain this current for up to 7 s. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 17 = 11 marks)

22 18 A negatively charged pion decays into a muon and an antineutrino. The diagram shows tracks in a particle detector formed in such an event. muon pion (a) Deduce whether the antineutrino is charged, giving two reasons for your decision. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Write a particle equation to represent this decay. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Turn over (c) According to the standard model, the pion and muon are classified within two different groups of particles. State which group each particle belongs to and describe the two groups. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (d) The momentum of the pion just before it decays is 9.1 × 10 −20 N s. Determine the magnetic flux density of the magnetic field which acts in the detector and state its direction. Scale of diagram 1 cm represents 10 cm pion charge = −1.6 × 10 −19 C (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Magnetic flux density = ...................................................... Direction of magnetic field = ............................................................................................................................... 24 (e) Use a vector diagram to determine the momentum of the antineutrino. The initial momentum of the muon is 1.59 × 10 −19 N s. (5) Momentum of antineutrino = ............................................................................................................. Direction of antineutrino = ............................................................................................................. (Total for Question 18 = 16 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS 25 Turn over List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 26 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 27 Turn over Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 28 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g

Turn over 3 3 When a force F is applied to a spring with stiffness k, the elastic potential energy stored is E. What is the elastic potential energy stored when a force 2F is applied to a spring with stiffness 2k? A E 2 B E C 2E D 8E (Total for Question 3 = 1 mark) 4 There are several different methods that can be used to determine the distance from our solar system to astronomical objects. These include the measurement of red shift, trigonometrical parallax and the use of standard candles. Which row of the table shows a suitable method for each of the objects named? Nearby star Nearby galaxy Very distant galaxy A parallax red shift standard candle B red shift standard candle parallax C parallax standard candle red shift D red shift parallax standard candle (Total for Question 4 = 1 mark)

4 5 A damped mass-spring system is driven into oscillation. The graph shows the amplitude of oscillation as the driving frequency is varied. Amplitude of oscillation Driving frequency The damping is decreased. Which row of the table describes what happens to the maximum amplitude of oscillation and the driving frequency at which this occurs? Maximum amplitude Frequency at which maximum amplitude occurs A decreases decreases B decreases increases C increases decreases D increases increases (Total for Question 5 = 1 mark)

Turn over 5 6 A proton can be considered to be both a point charge and a point mass. There is an electric field and a gravitational field associated with the proton. Which of the following statements about the fields is not correct? A Field strength is a vector. B Potential is always less than 0. C Potential is proportional to 1 distance from proton D Field strength is proportional to 1 (distance from proton)2 (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark) 7 A pendulum of length l with a bob of mass m oscillates with frequency f. What is the frequency of a pendulum of length 4l with a bob of mass 2m? A 4 f B 2 f C f D f 2 (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 Which of the following lenses would produce a real image of an object placed 15 cm away from the lens? A converging, focal length = 10 cm B converging, focal length = 20 cm C diverging, focal length = 10 cm D diverging, focal length = 20 cm (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

6 9 A student finds a Hertzsprung-Russell diagram in an old astronomy book and notices that the axes aren’t the same as in her current textbook. Absolute magnitude Spectral class –10 –5 0 +5 +10 +15 O B A F G K M Supergiants Giants Main sequence White dwarfs Which of the following graphs shows a correct alternative way to label the axes? Luminosity / Luminosity of Sun Temperature / K 10 000 100 1.0 0.01 3000 Supergiants Giants Main sequence White dwarfs A 5000 10 000 30 000 Luminosity / Luminosity of Sun Temperature / K 10 000 100 1.0 0.01 30 000 Supergiants Giants Main sequence White dwarfs B 10 000 5000 3000 Temperature / K 30 000 10 000 5000 3000 0.01 Supergiants Giants Main sequence White dwarfs C 1.0 100 10 000 30 000 10 000 5000 3000 10 000 Supergiants Giants Main sequence White dwarfs D 100 1.0 0.01 Temperature / K Luminosity / Luminosity of Sun Luminosity / Luminosity of Sun A B C D (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark)

Turn over 7 10 A detector is placed 30 cm from a gamma source, the count rate is 64 counts per minute. The detector is then placed 60 cm from the source. The background rate is presumed to be a constant 24 counts per minute. Which of the following gives the expected counts per minute? A 16 B 32 C 34 D 44 (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark) 11 A cup contains 180 g of black coffee at a temperature of 82 °C. 68 g of milk at a temperature of 2.7 °C is added to the coffee. An ideal temperature range for drinking coffee is said to be 50 °C to 60 °C. Deduce whether the coffee will be within the ideal temperature range when the milk is added. initial temperature of milk = 2.7 °C specific heat capacity of black coffee = 4.2 × 103 J kg−1 K−1 specific heat capacity of milk = 3.9 × 103 J kg−1 K−1 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 3 marks)

8 12 The diagram shows a transparent tank, with thin plastic sides, that can be used to determine the refractive index of a transparent liquid. transparent plastic tank Not to scale light source card w s t A rectangle of opaque card is stuck on the side of the tank containing the liquid. A light source is placed in front of the tank and the width s of the shadow of the card, which is formed on the back of the tank, is measured. The width t of the card and the width w of the tank are also measured. (a) The angle of incidence of the light as it enters the tank is 7.2° Show that the refractive index of the liquid is about 1.4 w = 35.0 cm t = 4.0 cm s = 10.2 cm (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. . Turn over 9 (b) Determine the speed of light in the liquid. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed of light = .................................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 5 marks)

10 13 A student measured the deflection of a mass attached to the end of a thin strip of metal. The strip was clamped to a bench at one end as shown. mass clamp deflection The student varied the force on the end of the strip by changing the mass attached. The deflection was measured each time when the mass was in its equilibrium position. The student obtained the following graph of deflection against force. Force / N Deflection / m 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 0 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 Turn over 11 (a) State why the mass will oscillate with simple harmonic motion when it is displaced slightly from its equilibrium position and released. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The student then investigated the oscillations of the mass on the metal strip. The student fixed different numbers of 10 g masses to the end of the metal strip. The student noticed that the smaller the mass the higher the frequency of the oscillations. He estimated that the maximum number of oscillations he could count was two per second. He decided that the smallest mass he should use was 50 g. Determine whether 50 g is the smallest mass he should use. You may assume that the system acts in the same way as a mass on a spring. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 7 marks)

12 14 The photograph shows a filament bulb. The filament is an emitter with 35% of the power output of a black body radiator of the same temperature. (a) When a potential difference (p.d) of 2.0 V is applied across the bulb, there is a current of 0.37 A in the filament. Calculate the temperature of the filament. surface area of filament = 3.9 × 10−6 m2 (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Temperature = .................................................................... Turn over 13 (b) In an experiment to investigate the efficiency of a filament light bulb a p.d. was applied. The p.d. and current were measured and the light bulb was observed. The p.d. was then increased and new measurements taken. When a small p.d. is applied to the bulb, no light is visible. If the p.d. is gradually increased, the filament starts to glow and eventually appears white. (i) Add to the graph to show the distribution of radiation from a black body at a temperature of 2026 K. Your answer should include a calculation. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Radiated power Wavelength / 10–6 m 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 visible spectrum (ii) Use your graph to explain why filament light bulbs are considered inefficient. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 10 marks)

14 15 The photograph shows a guitar. When a guitar string is plucked, a standing wave is created. (a) Explain how a standing wave is created on the string. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 15 (b) The diagram shows a standing wave on a guitar string. The oscillating length of the guitar string is 66 cm. (i) State the wavelength for this standing wave. (1) Wavelength = .................................................................... (ii) Calculate the frequency of vibration for this standing wave. tension in guitar string = 88.6 N mass per unit length of guitar string = 4.47 × 10−3 kg m−1 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Frequency = .................................................................... 16 (c) One end of the guitar string is wrapped around a cylindrical tuning peg. Turning the peg changes the total length of the string and hence changes the tension in the string. This changes the frequency of vibration of the string. (i) The length of one string is 68 cm. Calculate the extension required to produce a tension of 93.4 N in the string. Young modulus of string material = 1.8 × 109 N m−2 cross-sectional area of string = 6.6 × 10−7 m2 (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Extension = .................................................................... Turn over 17 (ii) The vibrating length of string is unchanged by turning the tuning peg. Explain the effect that tightening the string has on the frequency of the sound produced. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 15 = 13 marks)

18 16 Astronauts on the 1971 Apollo 14 mission to the Moon brought back many rock samples. It is now believed that one of these contains a piece of rock that originated on Earth about 4 billion years (4 × 109 years) ago. The piece of rock is believed to have been launched into space when an asteroid struck the Earth. (a) The rock sample contains uranium. The radioactive decay of uranium allows it to be used to determine the time since the rock was formed on the Earth. (i) The uranium isotope 238 92U becomes the lead isotope 206 82Pb through a series of radioactive decays. Calculate the number of α particles and the number of β particles emitted for one nucleus of 238 92U to decay to become a nucleus of 206 82Pb. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Number of α particles = .................................................................... Number of β particles = .................................................................... Turn over 19 (ii) The half-life of 238 92U is 4.47 × 109 years. The half-lives of the other stages in the decay to 206 82Pb are relatively so short that they can be ignored. There was no lead in the rock when it formed, so all the 206 82Pb in the sample is a product of 238 92U decay. In the sample, for every 103 uranium nuclei present at the start, 50 are now lead nuclei. Show that the age of the sample is about 4 × 109 years. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 (b) The gravitational potential between the Earth and the Moon due to the combined effect of their gravitational fields increases to a maximum value of −1.28 MJ kg−1 at a point between them. Calculate the minimum speed at which a rock would have to leave the Earth in order to reach the Moon. In your calculation, you may assume the rock has zero kinetic energy when it has maximum potential energy. mass of Earth = 5.97 × 1024 kg radius of Earth = 6370 km (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Minimum speed = .................................................................... Turn over 21 (c) Four billion years ago, the Moon had a different orbital period, because it was closer to the Earth than it is today. Calculate the period of the Moon’s orbit four billion years ago, when the radius of its orbit was 1.34 × 108 m. mass of Earth = 5.97 × 1024 kg (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Period = .................................................................... (Total for Question 16 = 12 marks)

22 17 In 1905 Einstein published his equation for the photoelectric effect. In 1916 Millikan demonstrated that the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is consistent with Einstein’s equation. *(a) Discuss the extent to which our current understanding of observations of the photoelectric effect supports the idea that light behaves as photons rather than as waves. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 23 (b) Millikan used his data to obtain a value of the Planck constant. The following graph of maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons against frequency was produced from his data for the photoelectric effect using lithium. 3.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 Frequency / 1014 Hz Maximum kinetic energy / 10−19 J Millikan suggested that the uncertainty from his results for lithium was as little as 1%. Determine whether the value of the Planck constant obtained from this graph is within 1% of the value stated on the data sheet for this examination paper. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 (c) Millikan’s experiments involved using different frequencies of light. These were obtained using a mercury vapour lamp which produced an emission spectrum with a specific number of known frequencies. The diagram shows some energy levels for a mercury atom. 0 eV −1.56 eV −1.57 eV −2.48 eV −3.71 eV −4.95 eV −5.52 eV −5.74 eV −10.38 eV Not to scale Determine which transition from the −3.71 eV energy level would produce light of wavelength 6.1 × 10−7 m. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Transition from −3.71 eV to .................................................................... Turn over 25 (d) Millikan used a device known as a monochromator to ensure that a single wavelength of light was used to illuminate the surface of the lithium. A monochromator separates wavelengths using a diffraction grating. Calculate the angle at which a diffraction grating would produce the most intense line at a single wavelength of 6.1 × 10−7 m. number of lines per mm for grating = 600 mm−1 (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Angle = .................................................................... (Total for Question 17 = 16 marks)

26 18 At the Culham Centre for Fusion Energy (CCFE) experiments are carried out to investigate nuclear fusion and the properties of plasmas. A plasma consists of ionised gas, containing positive ions and electrons. (a) In a fusion experiment at CCFE, ions of two isotopes of hydrogen fuse to produce helium ions and fast-moving neutrons. 1 2H + 1 3H → 2 4He + 0 1n Show that a single fusion reaction releases about 3 × 10−12 J of energy. mass of 1 2H = 2.013553 u mass of 1 3H = 3.015501 u mass of 2 4He = 4.001506 u mass of 0 1n = 1.008665 u (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 27 (b) Fusion occurs naturally in the core of stars. Explain why very high densities of matter and very high temperatures are needed to bring about and maintain nuclear fusion in stars. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (c) In a plasma experiment 5.0 mg of deuterium, an isotope of hydrogen, occupies a volume of 98 m3. The temperature of deuterium is raised to 1.3 × 108 K. In this experiment, the deuterium behaves as an ideal gas. (i) Calculate the pressure due to the deuterium ions. mass of deuterium ion = 3.3 × 10−27 kg (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Pressure = .................................................................... 28 (ii) Calculate the root mean square speed of the deuterium ions at this temperature. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Root mean square speed = .................................................................... (iii) The temperature of the plasma is monitored using the Doppler effect. Light from a laser is directed into the plasma and the wavelength of the light reflected is measured. The Doppler shift observed when light is reflected by a deuterium ion is twice the Doppler shift that would be observed for a source of light moving at the same speed as the deuterium ion. Calculate the maximum wavelength of light that would be detected after reflection from a deuterium ion moving at 1.5 × 106 m s−1. wavelength of laser light = 1064 nm (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Maximum wavelength detected = .................................................................... (Total for Question 18 = 14 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS Every effort has been made to contact copyright holders to obtain their permission for the use of copyright material. Pearson Education Ltd. will, if notified, be happy to rectify any errors or omissions and include any such rectifications in future editions. Turn over 29 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 30 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p Turn over 31 Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 32 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g

2 Answer ALL questions in the spaces provided. 1 A teacher is explaining the differences between accuracy and precision to her students. She draws the following diagram, which shows different degrees of accuracy and precision. The circles represent targets A, B, C and D and the dots represent arrows hitting the targets. A B C D precision accuracy Explain how targets A, B, C and D represent differing degrees of accuracy and precision. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 1 = 4 marks)

3 Turn over 2 A student released a ping pong ball in front of a metre rule and used a phone camera to record the motion of the ball as it fell. The phone camera captures 60 images per second, which may be played back one image at a time. (a) The ball was dropped from a height such that it reached its terminal velocity as it passed the metre rule. (i) Explain how the terminal velocity of the ball could be determined using the phone camera recording. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Explain how a systematic error could affect the value obtained for the terminal velocity. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) This experiment could have been attempted using a stopwatch to measure the time as the ping pong ball fell. Explain an advantage of using a phone camera rather than a stopwatch. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

4 3 A student carried out an experiment with a pendulum hung from a fixed support. The fixed support was a distance h above floor level as shown. h d fixed support string bob floor As the student was unable to measure the length of the pendulum directly, she measured the distance d from the bob to the floor. (a) To determine the period T of the pendulum, the student used the following method: • release the bob from its highest position and start a stopwatch • stop the stopwatch when the bob reaches the same position again. Criticise the student’s method for measuring the period. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5 Turn over (b) The student used her data to plot a graph of T 2 against d as shown below. 0.00 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 d / m T 2 / s2 Determine a value for the acceleration due to gravity g. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. g = ....................................................... (Total for Question 3 = 7 marks) 6 *4 Radium is a radioactive element. The most common isotope of radium has a half-life of almost two thousand years. A sample of radium can remain at a higher temperature than its surroundings for a long period of time. Explain how a sample of radium is able to release significant amounts of energy over a long period of time. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 4 = 6 marks) 7 Turn over BLANK PAGE

8 5 The photograph shows a statue of Buddha in Sri Lanka, which is protected by a lightning conductor. © Valery Shanin/123RF (a) During a storm, a potential difference of 2.7 MV was generated between a cloud and the top of the lightning conductor on the statue. A flash of lightning passed between the cloud and the lightning conductor, producing a current of 25 kA for a time of 7.5 ms. Calculate the energy transferred by the lightning strike. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Energy transferred = ....................................................... 9 Turn over (b) The lightning conductor is a length of copper wire with a diameter of 1.2 × 10–2 m and a resistance of 4.3 × 10−3 Ω. It runs along the back of the statue from the base to a height of 1.5 m above the top of the statue. A guidebook claims that the statue is over 30 m high. Assess the validity of this claim. resistivity of copper = 1.7 × 10−8 Ω m (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) Give a reason why the lightning conductor should be taller than the statue. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 5 = 8 marks)

10 6 A student determined the latent heat of vaporisation of a liquid using an electrical heater to boil the liquid in a Pyrex beaker. The apparatus used is shown below. Pyrex beaker heater liquid balance (a) She connected the heater into a circuit and took measurements of the potential difference V and the current I for the heater. Complete the circuit diagram to show a suitable circuit. (2) heater 11 Turn over (b) The student monitored the mass of the beaker and the liquid m over the time t for which the liquid was boiling. Her results are plotted on the graph. 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 m / g t / s The student used her graph to determine a value for the latent heat of the liquid in the beaker. She concluded that the liquid was pure water. Liquid Latent heat of vaporisation / MJ kg−1 Pure water 2.26 Weak salt water solution 2.10 Strong salt water solution 2.00 Comment on the validity of the student’s conclusion. V = 20.5 V I = 10.5 A (7) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12 (c) Explain how this method might be modified to improve the accuracy of the student’s conclusion. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... . ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... . ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... . .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 6 = 11 marks) 13 Turn over BLANK PAGE

14 7 At the end of the 19th century, J.J. Thompson used electric and magnetic fields to deflect beams of charged particles. A photograph of his apparatus is shown. electron source deflecting system evacuated tube screen © Science Museum London Electrons were accelerated through a potential difference to produce a beam of high-energy electrons. The beam was then deflected in perpendicular directions by the magnetic and electric fields. The final position of the beam on the screen was determined by the charge and mass of the electrons. (a) Explain how electrons from the source become a beam of high-energy electrons. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) An electron is travelling left to right and enters a region of uniform magnetic field as shown below. The direction of the magnetic field is perpendicular to the direction of travel of the electron. – uniform magnetic field (i) The magnetic field deflects the electron in the direction up the page. Explain the direction of the magnetic field that would produce this deflection. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... . .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15 Turn over (ii) Explain why the electron would travel in a circular path if no other forces acted on it. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) In a modern version of Thompson’s experiment, a uniform electric field of electric field strength E is applied so that the electric and magnetic forces on the electrons are equal and in opposite directions. (i) Show that for electrons to be undeflected their velocity must be given by v E B = where B is the magnetic flux density of the magnetic field. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The beam is produced by accelerating electrons through a potential difference of 250 V. The electric field strength is 1.4 × 104 V m−1. The magnetic flux density is 1.5 × 10−3 T. Calculate the value of the specific charge e/m for the electron using this data. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. e/m = ....................................................... 16 (d) In his original experiments, Thompson determined the specific charge of a range of particles. His results indicated that the specific charge of an electron is about 2000 times bigger than that for a hydrogen ion. Deduce what conclusion can be made from this information. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 7 = 12 marks) 17 Turn over BLANK PAGE

18 8 A student investigated the rate at which a hot liquid transfers thermal energy to the surroundings. He placed hot water in a Pyrex beaker and measured the temperature of the water using a liquid-in-glass thermometer. He obtained the following data for the temperature θ of the water at times t. He measured t using a stopwatch. t / s θ / °C 0 95 120 87 240 81 360 76 480 71 temperature of surroundings = 23 °C Theory suggests that a liquid transfers internal energy to the surroundings at a rate proportional to the temperature difference Δθ between the liquid and the surroundings. This leads to the expression Δθ = Δθ0e −bt where b is a constant and Δθ0 is the initial temperature difference. (a) Explain why a graph of ln Δθ against t should be a straight line. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) (i) Plot a graph of ln Δθ against t on the grid opposite. Use the columns provided in the table to show any processed data. (5) 19 Turn over 20 (ii) Determine the value of b. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. b = ....................................................... (c) The student suggested that the experiment would have been more accurate if a temperature sensor and data logger had been used to collect the data. Assess the validity of the student’s suggestion. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 8 = 14 marks) 21 Turn over BLANK PAGE

22 9 A simple loudspeaker consists of a cone, a coil of wire and a magnet. The cone and coil are attached to each other and are free to move. An alternating current in the coil causes the cone to oscillate. The loudspeaker is mounted in a wooden box. A cross-section through the loudspeaker is shown. cone coil magnet A student made the following observations: • when an alternating potential difference (p.d.) is applied to the coil, the cone oscillates • the frequency of oscillation is the same as the frequency of the p.d. • at particular frequencies, the box vibrates with a large amplitude. *(a) Explain these observations. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Turn over (b) The student connected a signal generator to the loudspeaker, and placed the loudspeaker near to one end of a long tube containing sand. The student adjusted the signal generator until the sand collected in small heaps as shown. tube heaps of sand loudspeaker (i) Explain why the sand collects in heaps. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The student determined the distance d between the centres of adjacent heaps. Describe the procedure she should follow to determine an accurate value for d. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 (iii) Assess whether the experimental data is consistent with a value for the speed of sound of 340 m s−1. signal generator frequency = 3.25 kHz. d = 5.1 cm (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 9 = 16 marks) 25 Turn over BLANK PAGE

26 10 A spring is made from loops of thick steel wire as shown. w There are two extra loops, one on each end of the spring. (a) A student determined the length of steel used to make the spring by using vernier calipers to measure the width w of the spring. The length of wire l on each loop is given by l = πw The student obtained the following values for w. w / mm 15.3 15.2 15.4 15.3 (i) Calculate l. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. l = ....................................................... (ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in your value for l. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. % uncertainty in l = ....................................................... 27 (iii) Calculate the total length L of wire used to make the spring. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. L = ....................................................... (b) The student measured the diameter d of the steel wire and obtained a value of 2.52 mm. (i) Explain which instrument he used to measure the diameter. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Estimate the percentage uncertainty in the student’s value for d. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. % uncertainty in d = ....................................................... (iii) The student used a balance to measure the mass m of the spring. He obtained a value of 32.0 ± 0.5 g. Estimate the percentage uncertainty in the mass of the spring. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. % uncertainty in m = ....................................................... (iv) The student calculated the density ρ of the steel using the equation ρ m V Calculate the percentage uncertainty in his value for the density of steel. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. % uncertainty in value for density of steel = ....................................................... Turn over 28 (v) Determine whether the data collected leads to a value for the density of steel in agreement with the standard value. density of steel = 7 800 kg m−3 (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 10 = 16 marks) 29 Turn over BLANK PAGE

30 11 Solar panels consisting of combinations of photovoltaic cells use energy in the radiation received from the Sun to generate electricity. (a) An advertisement for solar panels claims that the intensity of radiation from the Sun incident at the top of the Earth’s atmosphere is more than 2 kW m−2. Assess the validity of this claim. radius of Sun = 6.96 × 108 m surface temperature of Sun = 5790 K distance from Sun to Earth = 1.50 × 1011 m (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The average intensity of radiation from the Sun incident at the Earth’s surface over a 24-hour period has been determined to be 164 W m−2. Radiation from the Sun 31 Turn over (i) The average intensity of radiation from the Sun at the Earth’s surface is much less than the intensity incident at the top of the Earth’s atmosphere. Explain why. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) It is claimed that the area of solar panels needed to generate 100 GW of power is about 0.5% of the surface area of the Earth. Assess the validity of this claim. radius of Earth = 6.4 × 106 m typical efficiency of solar panels = 25% (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 32 (c) Scientists are developing a space station equipped with large solar panels. The space station would be located in a geostationary orbit. The space station would transfer energy to Earth as microwaves. (i) A space station in a geostationary orbit is above the equator and has a period of 24 hours. Explain one advantage of locating the space station in a geostationary orbit. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Calculate the height h of the space station above the equator when it is in a geostationary orbit. mass of Earth = 6.00 × 1024 kg 24 hours = 8.64 × 104 s (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. h = ....................................................... (Total for Question 11 = 18 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 120 MARKS 33 Turn over List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 34 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 35 Turn over Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 36 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g

Turn over 3 4 A rope is used to apply a force F to a box as shown. The box is pulled a distance d along a horizontal surface. F θ direction of motion Which of the following could be used to determine the work done on the box? A Fd sin θ B Fd sinθ C Fd cos θ D Fd cosθ (Total for Question 4 = 1 mark) 5 A torch is switched on for 5 minutes. The current in the torch bulb is 6 mA. Which of the following gives the charge, in coulombs, that flows in this time? A 6 × 10–3 × 5 B 6 10 5 3 C 6 300 D 6 × 10–3 × 300 (Total for Question 5 = 1 mark)

4 6 The diagram shows the two forces acting on a point mass. 30 N 40 N The mass accelerates. Which of the following gives the angle between the direction of the acceleration and the 40 N force? A cos–1 (30/40) B sin–1 (40/50) C tan–1 (30/40) D tan–1 (40/50) (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark) 7 Two resistors of resistance R1 and R2 are connected to a battery as shown. The terminal potential difference of the battery is V. V R1 R2 Which of the following gives the potential difference across the resistor of resistance R1? A R R V 1 2 × B R R R V 1 1 2 C R R V 2 1 × D R R R V 2 1 2 (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark)

Turn over 5 8 A motor is used to lift an object as shown. The object is raised through a vertical height of 75 cm at a constant speed of 0.40 m s−1. 0.25 kg motor Which of the following gives the rate of increase of potential energy of the object in watts? A 0.25 × 9.81 × 0.40 B 0.25 × 0.75 C 0.25 × 9.81 × 0.75 D 0.5 × 0.25 × (0.40)2 (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

6 9 A uniform rigid rod AB of length 1.50 m has a weight W of 6.5 N. A force of 3.5 N applied at A balances the rod on a pivot as shown. Diagram not to scale A B 3.5 N pivot W Calculate the distance of the pivot from A when the rod is in equilibrium. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Distance of pivot from A = ...................................................... (Total for Question 9 = 2 marks)

Turn over 7 10 Two resistors are connected as shown. 180 Ω 120 Ω (a) Show that the resistance of the combination is about 70 Ω. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) This resistor combination is connected to a battery of e.m.f. ε and internal resistance r. 120 Ω 180 Ω The switch is closed for 5 minutes. Calculate the energy dissipated in the resistor combination. ε = 9.0 V r = 2.5 Ω (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Energy dissipated in resistor combination = ...................................................... (Total for Question 10 = 6 marks)

8 11 A skydiver made a skydive from a plane. (Source: © Sky Antonio/Shutterstock) The graph shows how the velocity v of the skydiver varied with time t, from the instant she left the plane to the instant just before the parachute opened. 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 v / m s–1 t / s Turn over 9 (a) Determine the acceleration of the skydiver when t = 4.0 s. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Acceleration of skydiver = ...................................................... (b) Determine an approximate value for the displacement of the skydiver over the first 16.0 s of the skydive. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Displacement of skydiver = ...................................................... (Total for Question 11 = 6 marks)

10 12 The resistivity of a metal is an important property of wire used in an electric circuit. (a) A student carried out an experiment to determine the resistivity of a type of wire. He used a micrometer to measure the diameter d of the wire. (Source: © Viktor Chursin/Shutterstock) He recorded the following values. d1 / mm d2 / mm d3 / mm d4 / mm 1.40 1.44 1.42 1.41 (i) Calculate the percentage uncertainty in the mean diameter of the wire. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. % uncertainty in mean diameter of wire = ...................................................... Turn over 11 (ii) The student used an ohmmeter to measure the resistance R of a 1.65 m length of the wire. He looked up the resistivity values of some materials. Material Titanium Constantan Stainless Steel Resistivity / 10–7 Ω m 4.2 4.7 6.9 Identify the material of the wire. R = 0.72 Ω (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Nichrome wire is often used in heating elements. Nichrome wire is used to make a coil for a 65 W mains powered heater. The nichrome wire has a resistance per metre of 87.5 Ω m−1 . Calculate the length of wire required. potential difference across the coil = 230 V (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Length of wire required = ...................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 9 marks)

12 13 Two ice skaters are gliding across the horizontal ice surface at an ice rink. (Source: © ITAR-TASS News Agency/Alamy Stock Photo) (a) Initially the skaters move together with a speed of 5.6 m s–1. The male skater pushes the female skater forwards. After being pushed, she has a forward speed of 7.5 m s−1. Calculate the speed of the male skater immediately after pushing the female skater forwards. mass of male skater = 66 kg mass of female skater = 52 kg (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Speed of male skater = ...................................................... Turn over 13 (b) Explain why the male skater experiences a change in his velocity when he pushes the female skater forwards. You should make reference to Newton’s laws of motion in your explanation. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) When the male skater pushes the female skater forwards, the total kinetic energy of the skaters increases. Explain why kinetic energy is not conserved in this interaction. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 9 marks)

14 14 Grasshoppers can jump up to twenty times their length to escape predators. The magnitude of the launch velocity v does not vary significantly for a given grasshopper, so the length of the jump mostly depends on the launch angle θ. The diagram shows a grasshopper at the instant it launches. v θ (Source: adapted from http://gclipart.com/grasshopper-clipart_28241/) (a) The grasshopper jumps from rest on level ground. The launch velocity is 2.6 m s−1 at an angle of 57° to the horizontal. (i) Show that the vertical component of the launch velocity is about 2 m s−1. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Assess whether the horizontal distance travelled by the grasshopper in the jump is about 20 times the grasshopper’s length. length of grasshopper = 5.0 cm (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 15 (b) Grasshoppers with longer legs accelerate to their launch velocity over a longer time. Leg length has a negligible effect on both the mass of a grasshopper and the energy released in a jump. Explain how leg length affects the force exerted on the ground during a jump. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) In a recent study it was discovered that grasshoppers, living in an environment with hunting spiders, increase their launch velocity on average by 20%. The jump length of these grasshoppers was more than doubled. Assess whether a 20% increase in launch velocity alone is sufficient to double the jump length. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 14 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION A = 54 MARKS 16 BLANK PAGE Turn over 17 SECTION B Answer ALL questions in the spaces provided. 15 A force meter measures force by making use of Hooke's Law. The extension of a spring inside the force meter allows the magnitude of the force applied to be read from a scale. (a) The spring in one type of force meter extends by 5.5 cm when a force of 2.5 N is applied. (i) Show that the stiffness of the spring is about 50 N m−1. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Two identical force meters of this type support a mass of 0.400 kg as shown. Diagram not to scale 60° 0.400 kg (Source: adapted from https://image.slidesharecdn.com/ balancedunbalancedgravityfriction-170509114658/95/balanced-unbalanced-gravity- friction-14-638.jpg?cb=1494330595) Calculate the extension ∆ x of each spring. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ∆ x = ...................................................... 18 *(b) A beaker of water is placed on a balance and a rock is hung from a force meter as shown in diagram 1. The initial reading on the balance is R, and the initial reading on the force meter is F. The rock is lowered gently into the beaker of water until it is completely submerged. Diagram not to scale rock water balance Diagram 1 Diagram 2 (Source: adapted from https://passnownow.com/wp-content/uploads/2014/06/upthrust) Turn over 19 Explain any changes in the readings R and F as the rock is lowered into the water as shown in diagram 2. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 15 = 12 marks)

20 16 A student carried out an experiment to determine the focal length of a converging lens. The student used a bulb to illuminate an object as shown. The converging lens produced an image of the object on a screen. The student adjusted the position of the screen until the image was in focus. He repeated the procedure for different distances between the object and the lens. The distance v from the lens to the screen was measured for each lens position. bulb object lens screen v The student measured the height ho of the object and the height hi of the corresponding image on the screen for each lens position. The magnification m was calculated. To determine the focal length f of the lens the student used the equation m v f = −1 (a) Explain why a graph of m on the y-axis and v on the x-axis should be a straight line. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The student obtained the following data. object height, ho = 2.04 cm v / cm hi / cm m 61.5 5.92 2.90 47.0 4.24 2.08 39.6 3.30 1.62 31.2 2.15 23.8 1.33 0.652 (i) Complete the table and plot a graph of m against v on the grid opposite. (6) Turn over 21 22 (ii) Determine a value for f. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. f = ...................................................... (c) If the distance from object to the lens is less than a certain value, no image is produced on the screen. Explain why. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 16 = 14 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION B = 26 MARKS TOTAL FOR PAPER = 80 MARKS Turn over 23 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s–2 (close to Earth’s surface) Electron charge e = –1.60 × 10–19C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10–31kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19J Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg–1 (close to Earth’s surface) Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34J s Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108m s–1 Mechanics Electric circuits Potential difference V W Q = Resistance R V I = Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P V R = 2 W = VIt Resistivity ρl R A = Current I Q t = ∆ ∆ I = nqvA Kinematic equations of motion s u v t = + ( ) 2 v = u + at s = ut + at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ΣF = ma g F m = W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P E t = P W t = efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency = useful power output total power input 1 2 1 2 24 Materials Waves and Particle Nature of Light Wave speed v = fλ Speed of a transverse wave on a string T v μ = Intensity of radiation I P A = Power of a lens P f = 1 P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u + = 1 1 v f Magnification for a lens m v u = = image height object height Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n c v = Critical angle sin C n = 1 Photon model E = hf Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + ½mv 2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p Density m ρ V = Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law F = kΔx Pressure p F A = Young modulus Stress F σ A = Δ Strain x ε x = σ E ε = Elastic strain energy ΔEel FΔx 1 2 =

Turn over 5 6 The following measurements were made to determine the Young modulus of a metal bar. original length of bar = 0.50 m area of cross section = 4.5 × 10−4 m2 tensile force applied to bar = 36 000 N extension of bar = 2.0 × 10−4 m Which of the following gives the Young modulus of the metal? A 36000 0 50 4 5 10 2 0 10 4 4 × × × × − − . . . B 4 5 10 2 0 10 36000 0 50 4 4 . . . × × × × − − C 36000 2 0 10 4 5 10 0 50 4 4 × × × × − − . . . D 4 5 10 0 50 36000 2 0 10 4 4 . . . × × × × − − (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark)

6 7 The diagram shows the position of two particles, X and Y, on a transverse wave. The wave is travelling from left to right. direction of wave travel Y X Which of the following describes the directions in which the particles at X and Y are moving at the instant shown? Particle X Particle Y A down down B down up C up down D up up (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 A beam of light from a torch with power P is shone onto a surface. The light is spread over a circular area with a radius r. Which of the following gives the intensity of the light on the surface? A P × 4πr2 B 2 4π P r C P × πr2 D 2 π P r (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

Turn over 7 9 In an investigation to determine the speed of sound in air, a student sets up an oscilloscope to display the waveform of a sound wave as shown. The timebase is set to 25 µs / division. (a) Determine the frequency of the sound wave. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Frequency = ....................................................... (b) The student sets the timebase on the oscilloscope to a lower value per division. Describe any changes to the appearance of the waveform on the screen. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 9 = 3 marks)

8 10 Concrete is a material used in buildings due to its high compressive strength. (a) A concrete post can be checked for internal cracks using a pulse-echo technique. A transducer that transmits and receives ultrasound pulses is positioned against the side of the post as shown. transducer 0.2 m A pulse hits a crack and is reflected and is then detected by the transducer. Deduce whether a crack at a depth of 0.2 m can be detected. time between pulses = 160 µs speed of sound in concrete = 3200 m s−1 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Another concrete post is reinforced with steel rods, to increase its tensile strength. A steel rod is under a tensile load of 130 N and extends by 4.0 × 10−4 m. The steel has not reached its elastic limit. Calculate the elastic strain energy in the steel rod. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Elastic strain energy = ....................................................... (Total for Question 10 = 5 marks)

Turn over 9 11 An electron in its ground state absorbs electromagnetic radiation of wavelength λ. The energy level diagram represents the resulting energy transition of the electron. ground state n = 1 −10.8 eV −6.5 eV n = 3 n = 2 (a) Calculate the wavelength of radiation absorbed by the electron. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wavelength = ....................................................... (b) The electron eventually returns to its ground state. Explain, with reference to the energy level diagram, how this may result in the emission of radiation with a longer wavelength than λ. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 6 marks)

10 12 Vibrations of a car engine cause a sound wave in air. (a) Describe how the displacement of air molecules causes pressure variations in the air. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 11 (b) A silencer is a device fitted to a car to reduce the sound from the engine. Some sound passes through the silencer chamber and is reflected twice. Some sound passes straight through the chamber without being reflected. The simplified diagram shows the paths of the sound as it travels through the chamber. Sound leaving the chamber is a combination of sound waves from the two paths. The sound waves are in phase as they enter the chamber. sound from engine chamber l An engine produces sound with a frequency of about 140 Hz. Explain why, to reduce this sound, the length l of the chamber should be about 60 cm. speed of sound in air = 340 m s−1 (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 12 = 7 marks) 12 *13 A student views a laptop screen through a polarising filter. Initially the screen appears normal brightness. He rotates the filter to 90° and observes that the screen appears dark. Explain what the student observes as he gradually rotates the filter to 180° and then to 270°. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 6 marks)

Turn over 13 14 A seiche is a standing wave that can form on the surface of a lake in strong winds, causing flooding and erosion. (a) Early in 2020, a single-node seiche was observed on Lake Erie in the USA. A node formed at the centre of the lake. Antinodes formed at the two ends of the lake. The speed v of a seiche wave is given by v = gh where h is the mean depth of the water. Calculate the period of oscillation of the seiche. length of Lake Erie = 400 km mean depth of Lake Erie = 19 m (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Period of oscillation = ....................................................... 14 (b) Erosion causes clay particles to be washed into the lake, making the lake cloudy. The lake can remain cloudy to a depth of about 4 m for more than 6 months. One spherical clay particle has a radius of 2.5 × 10−7 m. Deduce whether this particle takes more than 6 months to fall 4 m. You should assume that the water in the lake remains still. viscosity of water = 1.0 × 10−3 kg m−1 s−1 density of water = 1000 kg m−3 density of clay = 2650 kg m−3 (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 15 (c) The temperature of the lake decreases with depth. Explain how this may affect the rate at which a particle falls. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (d) In an investigation to determine the viscosity of water, a student drops a small sphere into a cylinder of water. The student uses a stopwatch to record the time it takes for the sphere to fall through the water. Assess whether the stopwatch is suitable for measuring the time in this investigation. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 13 marks)

16 15 The human eye acts as a converging lens system that produces an image on the retina at the back of the eye as shown. front of eye retina Diagram NOT to scale A person with eyesight problems may wear either diverging or converging contact lenses. (a) The diagram below shows an object in front of a converging lens. F is the principal focus. object converging lens F F Determine the position and magnification of the image produced by the lens, by completing a ray diagram. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Magnification = ....................................................... Turn over 17 (b) A short-sighted eye cannot focus on distant objects, because the power of the eye is too great. One student with short sight cannot focus on objects further than 1.5 m without wearing her contact lenses. To view distant objects, it is determined that the combined power of her eye and her contact lens should be 41.7 D. Determine the power and type of lens needed to correct her vision. Assume the equations for thin lens apply to both lenses. distance from eye lens to retina = 2.4 cm (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Power = ....................................................... Type of lens ....................................................... (Total for Question 15 = 8 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION A = 56 MARKS

18 SECTION B Answer ALL questions in the spaces provided. 16 Read the extract and answer the questions that follow. In the 17th century there were two proposed theories to explain the refraction of light. Using a wave model, Huygens stated that light slows down when it passes from air to water. Using a particle model, Newton stated that light speeds up when it passes from air to water. Newton’s theory was more readily accepted until the speed of light in water was measured in the 19th century. In the early 20th century, Einstein used observations from the photoelectric effect to provide evidence for the particle model of light. Nowadays, both the wave model of light and the particle model of light are accepted, as each can be used to explain different aspects of the behaviour of light. (a) Give two reasons why Huygens’ theory for the refraction of light eventually became accepted. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) A ray of light travelling in air is incident on some water with an angle of incidence of 35°. The angle of refraction is 26°. Deduce whether this is consistent with Huygens’ statement about the speed of light as it passes from air to water. Your answer should include a calculation. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 19 (c) Diffraction and interference can be explained using the wave model of light. In an investigation to determine the wavelength of light from a laser, the light passed through a diffraction grating with 300 lines per millimetre. A diffraction pattern consisting of a series of bright dots was observed on a screen. The following data were recorded: distance between grating and screen = 2.00 m distance from central maximum to 2nd order maximum = 89.0 cm. Calculate the wavelength of light from the laser. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Wavelength = ....................................................... 20 (d) In a demonstration of the photoelectric effect, electromagnetic radiation is shone onto a clean metal surface. It can be shown that the metal loses negative charge when the radiation has a frequency above a certain threshold frequency. Explain how the particle model of light is consistent with this observation. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (e) In the 1920s, experiments demonstrating diffraction of electrons confirmed de Broglie’s work on the wave nature of particles. In one such experiment an electron had a momentum of 4.8 × 10−24 kg m s−1. Measurements confirmed that the de Broglie wavelength of the electron was 1.40 × 10−10 m. Deduce that these observations are consistent with the value of h given on the data sheet at the back of this exam paper. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 16 = 14 marks)

Turn over 21 17 Some sports place high stresses on the bones in the body, which can result in injury. (a) A gymnast of mass 45 kg dismounts from a beam. Her centre of mass is displaced through 1.6 m vertically before her feet touch the ground. As she lands, the bones in the lower part of her legs experience a force from the ground. The time between hitting the ground and coming to rest is 0.90 s. (i) Calculate the mean force from the ground on the gymnast. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Mean force from the ground = ....................................................... (ii) Explain how bending both knees when landing helps the gymnast prevent an injury. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 (b) The graph shows how stress varies with strain for normal bone and for unhealthy bone. normal bone unhealthy bone Strain Stress Describe how the graph shows that unhealthy bone under stress is more likely to break than normal bone. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 17 = 10 marks) TOTAL FOR SECTION B = 24 MARKS TOTAL FOR PAPER = 80 MARKS Turn over 23 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s–2 (close to Earth’s surface) Electron charge e = –1.60 × 10–19C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10–31kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19J Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg–1 (close to Earth’s surface) Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34J s Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108m s–1 Mechanics Electricity Potential difference V W Q = Resistance R V I = Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P V R = 2 W = VIt Resistivity ρl R A = Current I Q t = ∆ ∆ I = nqvA Kinematic equations of motion s u v t = + ( ) 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ΣF = ma g F m = W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P E t = P W t = efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency = useful power output total power input 24 Materials Waves and Particle Nature of Light Wave speed v = fλ Speed of a transverse wave on a string T v μ = Intensity of radiation I P A = Power of a lens P f = 1 P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u + = 1 1 v f Magnification for a lens m v u = = image height object height Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n c v = Critical angle sin C n = 1 Photon model E = hf Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + ½mv 2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p Density m ρ V = Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔx Young modulus Stress F σ A = Δ Strain x ε x = σ E ε = Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔx

Turn over 3 3 A ball was dropped from rest, from a height above the ground. The ball bounced back up to about half its initial height. Which graph shows how the velocity v of the ball varied with time t ? A v t B v t C v t D v t A B C D (Total for Question 3 = 1 mark) 4 Questions 4 and 5 refer to the information below. Two resistors are connected in parallel and the current in one of them is 2.0 A, as shown. I 2.0 A 120 Ω 60 Ω 4 Which of the following is the current I in ampere? A 3.0 B 4.0 C 5.0 D 6.0 (Total for Question 4 = 1 mark) 5 Which of the following is the total resistance of the resistors in parallel? A 20 Ω B 40 Ω C 90 Ω D 180 Ω (Total for Question 5 = 1 mark)

Turn over 5 6 A trapdoor is fixed to a vertical wall with a hinge. A wire is attached to the other end of the trapdoor and inclined at an angle of 60°, as shown. The wire holds the trapdoor horizontal. 60° wire trapdoor hinge vertical wall Which of the following shows the free-body force diagram for the trapdoor? A B C D A B C D (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark)

6 7 A light dependent resistor (LDR) and a resistor are connected to a battery, as shown. The intensity of light incident on the LDR increases. Which row of the table describes the change in the resistance of the LDR and the change in the potential difference across the resistor? Resistance of LDR Potential difference across the resistor A decreases decreases B decreases increases C increases decreases D increases increases (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 A potential difference is applied across two parallel plates. A particle carrying a charge of +0.1 C is placed between the plates and experiences a force F. The distance between the plates is halved. The potential difference remains constant. Which of the following is now equal to the electric field strength between the plates? A   5F B 10F C 20F D 40F (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

Turn over 7 9 A capacitor is connected to a power supply and charged to a potential difference V0. The graph shows how the potential difference V across the capacitor varies with the charge Q on the capacitor. V Q V0 At a potential difference V0 a small charge ∆Q is added to the capacitor. This results in a small increase in potential difference ∆V across the capacitor. Which of the following gives the approximate increase in energy stored on the capacitor due to this extra charge? A  ∆V × ∆Q B Δ Δ 2 V Q × C  V0 × ∆Q D 0 Δ 2 V Q × (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark) 10 Which of the following is a unit of magnetic flux? A N C−1 B T m−2 C V s D Wb m2 (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark)

8 11 The International Space Station (ISS) orbits the Earth with a constant speed v. The orbit is circular and of radius r. (a) The diagram represents two positions, A and B, of ISS during its orbit. r A B v Draw a labelled vector diagram, in the space below, of the velocities at the two positions that shows the acceleration is directed towards the centre of the orbit. (2) Turn over 9 (b) (i) The ISS completes one orbit in 92 minutes. Calculate the centripetal acceleration of the ISS. r = 6800 km (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Centripetal acceleration = ....................................................... (ii) Astronauts in the ISS are often described as being “weightless”. Discuss whether the astronauts are “weightless” when they are orbiting the Earth in the ISS. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 11 = 9 marks)

10 12 In the game of golf a stationary ball is hit by a club. One of the aims of the game is to land the ball on a patch of ground called the green. The graph shows how the force F exerted by the club on the ball varies with time t as the ball is hit. 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 t / ms F / kN (a) State why the area under the graph represents impulse. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) (i) Show that the velocity of the ball is about 30 m s−1 immediately after it is hit by the club. mass of ball = 0.046 kg (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 11 (ii) The ball has a time of flight of 3.5 s before landing. The green is a vertical distance of 7.5 m above the point at which the ball was hit, as shown. The green is about seventy metres away from where the ball is hit. flight of ball green 7.5 m ball hit at this point Deduce whether, if air resistance is ignored, the ball could land on the green after a flight time of 3.5 s. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 12 = 9 marks) 12 BLANK PAGE

Turn over 13 13 The diagram shows two parallel metal plates with a potential difference (p.d.) of 100 V across them. Three equipotential lines are shown. 0V +100V metal plate metal plate (a) Draw lines to represent the electric field in the shaded area. (4) 14 (b) A parallel plate capacitor consists of a thin layer of insulator of thickness d between two plates of conducting material of area A. conducting material d A insulator The capacitor has a capacitance 0.1 μF and is charged to a p.d. of 100 V by connecting it to an electrical supply. The capacitor is then disconnected from the supply and the p.d. between the two plates slowly decreases. This is because the insulator is not perfect and a small charge can flow through it. The graph shows how the p.d. varies with time. 25 30 20 15 10 5 0 60 70 80 90 100 50 40 30 20 10 0 Time / hours p.d. / V Turn over 15 The insulator is a type of plastic and should have a resistivity greater than 1014 Ω m. Deduce whether the plastic used in this capacitor has a resistivity greater than this value. A = 5.6 × 10−3 m2 d = 0.6 × 10−6 m (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 9 marks)

16 14 The world solar challenge is set every two years, in Australia. The challenge is to complete a three thousand kilometre route with a vehicle powered only by the Sun. Vehicles have their surfaces fitted with solar panels, as shown in the photograph. (Source: © LAURENT DOUEK/LOOK AT SCIENCES/SCIENCE PHOTO LIBRARY) (a) One of the solar panels has an e.m.f. of 8.2 V when in sunlight. The terminal potential difference is 5.5 V when a current of 0.45 A is drawn from the solar panel. Calculate the internal resistance of the solar panel in these conditions. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Internal resistance = ....................................................... (b) A bank of 380 of these solar panels is used to charge the battery in a vehicle. The panels are connected in parallel and the current provided by each panel is 0.45 A. When fully charged, the energy stored in the battery is 12 kW h. Calculate the time, in hours, to fully charge this battery if the solar panels are in sunlight. Assume the efficiency of charging this battery is 100%. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Time = ....................................................... hours Turn over 17 (c) The vehicle can reach a maximum speed of 34 m s−1 on flat ground. The electric motor used to move the vehicle has a power of 4.5 kW. (i) Calculate the initial acceleration of the vehicle as it starts from rest. mass of vehicle and driver = 420 kg (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Initial acceleration = ....................................................... (ii) State one assumption made in this calculation. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (d) Solar power alone would not be suitable for a family car because it is not sunny all the time. Give two further reasons why solar power alone would not be suitable. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 14 = 12 marks)

18 15 At the beginning of the 20th century, Rutherford carried out large-angle alpha particle scattering experiments using gold (197 79Au) foil. The vast majority of the alpha particles went straight through the foil whilst a few were deflected straight back. (a) Describe how the model of the atom changed, as a consequence of these experiments. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (b) In one experiment the alpha particles had an initial energy of 7.7 MeV. Calculate the distance of closest approach of the alpha particles to the nucleus of a gold atom. Assume that the gold nucleus remains at rest. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Distance of closest approach = ....................................................... Turn over 19 (c) Rutherford also carried out the experiment with aluminium (27 13Al) foil. The aluminium foil had the same thickness as the gold foil and the alpha particles had the same initial kinetic energy. The following observations were made. Observation 1: The fraction of alpha particles scattered at any particular angle for aluminium foil was always much less than for gold foil. Observation 2: The alpha particles scattered from aluminium foil had less kinetic energy than the alpha particles scattered from gold foil. Explain how these observations can be used to deduce how an aluminium nucleus compares to a gold nucleus. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 15 = 12 marks) 20 BLANK PAGE

Turn over 21 16 The bubble chamber photograph shows tracks made by a proton and a pion. The proton and pion were both created by the decay of a lambda particle. No other particles were produced. *(a) Explain how observations and measurements from the photograph can be used to establish information about the lambda particle. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22 (b) The lambda particle consists of up, down and strange quarks. Explain how the conservation of charge, baryon number and lepton number apply to the decay of the lambda particle. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (c) Write an equation to represent the decay of the lambda (Λ) particle. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (d) The rest mass of the lambda particle is 1115 MeV / c2. (i) Calculate this mass in kg. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Mass = ....................................................... kg Turn over 23 (ii) The rest mass of a proton is 940 MeV / c2. The rest mass of a pion is 140 MeV / c2. The kinetic energy of the lambda particle just before decay is 4.95 GeV. Calculate the total kinetic energy of the proton and pion in MeV. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Total kinetic energy = ....................................................... MeV (Total for Question 16 = 16 marks)

24 17 The diagrams show the plan view and side view of a moving coil ammeter. Plan view soft iron cylinder S N pointer scale moving coil magnet pivot pivot S N B B l w I coil soft iron cylinder Side view magnet The fixed soft iron cylinder and magnets produce a uniform magnetic field of magnetic flux density B. The coil is able to rotate within this magnetic field. The coil has width w and length l. There is a current I in the coil in the direction shown in the side view diagram. (a) (i) Explain which way the coil will rotate. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 25 (ii) Show that the moment M on the coil about the pivot, due to the magnetic field, is given by M = BAIN where A is the cross-sectional area of the coil N is the number of turns of wire on the coil. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 26 (b) An ammeter of this type has a resistance of 625 Ω and will measure a maximum current of 1.6 mA. The ammeter can be adapted to measure potential difference by adding a resistor in series with the ammeter. This resistor is known as a multiplier. The ammeter is adapted so that it can measure potential differences up to 5.0 V as shown. 625 Ω multiplier 5.0 V The following multipliers are available: 200 Ω          2500 Ω          3125 Ω          3750 Ω Deduce which multiplier should be used. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 27 (c) The coil within a very sensitive moving coil ammeter can be damaged when the ammeter is transported. The two ends of the coil are connected together when the ammeter is transported. This reduces the movement of the coil and makes it less likely to be damaged. A student suggests that this is due to Faraday’s law and Lenz’s law. Explain how these laws apply to this situation. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 17 = 13 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS 28 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 29 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 30 Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 31 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 32 BLANK PAGE

Turn over 5 7 The photoelectric effect provides evidence for the particle nature of electromagnetic radiation. Which of the following observations of the photoelectric effect could also be explained using the wave nature of electromagnetic radiation? A The emission of photoelectrons is instantaneous. B The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons depends on frequency. C The rate of emission of photoelectrons depends on intensity. D There is a minimum frequency for emission of photoelectrons to occur. (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) 8 The acceleration of free fall at the surface of the Earth is 9.81 m s−2. The mass of the Earth is M and the diameter of the Earth is D. Which of the following gives the acceleration of free fall, in m s−2, at the surface of a planet with diameter D 2 and mass M 9 ? A 9 81 2 9 . × B 9 81 4 9 . × C 9 81 2 3 . × D 9 81 9 4 . × (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

6 9 A mass is suspended from a spring and allowed to come to equilibrium. The mass is displaced vertically and moves with simple harmonic motion. The graph shows how the resultant force on the mass varies with time. Force Time Which of the following graphs shows how the velocity v of the mass varies with time t over the same time interval? v t v t A B v t v t C D A B C D (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark)

Turn over 7 10 The diagram represents an arrangement used to generate standing waves on a string. vibration generator masses on mass hanger pulley string A standing wave pattern with two nodes is obtained as shown. Which of the following single changes could produce a standing wave pattern with three nodes? A decreasing the distance between the vibration generator and pulley B decreasing the frequency of the vibration generator C decreasing the mass on the mass hanger D decreasing the mass per unit length of the string (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark)

8 11 A simple pendulum consisting of a thread and a bob is set up next to a horizontal rod. The bob is displaced to the left and released. When the bob reaches the equilibrium position the thread strikes the horizontal rod. For half of the cycle, only the lower part of the pendulum moves. The diagram shows the swing of the pendulum. rod bob thread The diagram below shows the dimensions of the pendulum. 67 cm 24 cm Turn over 9 Determine the frequency of the oscillations of the pendulum. ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Frequency = .................................................................... (Total for Question 11 = 4 marks)

10 12 Latte is a type of coffee made with hot frothy milk. The milk is heated by pumping steam into it. Calculate the maximum mass of milk that could be warmed to a temperature of 65 °C by absorbing 15 g of steam at 100 °C. initial temperature of milk = 4.0 °C specific heat capacity of milk = 3900 J kg−1 K−1 specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J kg−1 K−1 specific latent heat of vaporisation of water = 2.3 × 106 J kg−1 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Maximum mass = .................................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 4 marks) Turn over 11 *13 The energy radiated by stars is released by nuclear fusion. Explain the conditions required to bring about and maintain nuclear fusion in stars. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 6 marks)

12 14 A student investigated the terminal velocity of steel spheres falling through oil. The student obtained the following results. radius of steel sphere = 1.50 mm volume of steel sphere = 1.41 × 10−8 m3 mass of steel sphere = 1.10 × 10−4 kg maximum speed of sphere = 0.849 m s−1 The student had the following table. Type of oil Density at 26 °C / kg m−3 Viscosity at 26 °C / Pa s Corn 918 0.0447 Hazelnut 918 0.0504 Sunflower 918 0.0414 (a) Identify which type of oil the student used. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 13 (b) The values in the table are for oil at 26 °C. Explain the effect of carrying out the investigation with oil at a lower temperature. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 6 marks)

14 15 One of the largest stars in our galaxy is VY Canis Majoris. This star’s radius is 1420 times the radius of the Sun. The luminosity of this star is 270 000 times the luminosity of the Sun. A student states that the surface temperature of VY Canis Majoris must be much greater than the surface temperature of the Sun. (a) Determine whether the student’s statement is correct. surface temperature of Sun = 5780 K luminosity of Sun = 3.85 × 1026 W radius of Sun = 6.96 × 108 m (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Calculate the wavelength with maximum intensity in the black body radiation spectrum of VY Canis Majoris. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Wavelength = .................................................................... Turn over 15 (c) Add the position of VY Canis Majoris to the Hertzsprung Russell diagram to determine which type of star it is. (2) 24 000 Luminosity / Lʘ 12 000 6000 3000 Temperature / K 106 104 102 1 10−2 10−4 Type of star .................................................................... (Total for Question 15 = 7 marks)

16 16 The Planck constant can be determined in a school laboratory using light emitting diodes (LEDs). An LED emits light when the potential difference (p.d.) across it is large enough to transfer sufficient energy to an electron to result in the emission of a photon. The electron must have energy greater than or equal to the photon energy. The minimum p.d. required to produce light from LEDs emitting different frequencies was measured by increasing the p.d. from zero until light was first seen. The graph shows the results. 4.00 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 Frequency / 1014 Hz 2.60 2.40 2.20 2.00 1.80 1.60 1.40 1.20 1.00 Minimum p.d. / V Turn over 17 (a) Determine the value of the Planck constant given by this graph. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Value of Planck constant given by graph = .................................................................... (b) There are two problems with using LEDs to determine the Planck constant: • when the p.d. is increased and the LED first emits light it is difficult to see • the LEDs do not emit a single frequency but also light of frequencies slightly above and below the recorded frequency. Discuss the extent to which these problems are consistent with obtaining a result from this graph for the Planck constant which is higher than the accepted value. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 16 = 7 marks)

18 17 Astronomers observing stars at the centre of our galaxy have suggested that many of them are orbiting a supermassive black hole. The mass of this black hole is 9.2 × 1036 kg. (a) Calculate the orbital period for a star in a circular orbit at a distance of 1.9 × 1014 m from a black hole of this mass. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Orbital period = .................................................................... (b) The star S0-2 is in a highly elliptical orbit around the position of the black hole. At its point of closest approach, S0-2 is at a distance of 1.8 × 1013 m from the centre of the black hole. At the most distant point of its orbit, S0-2 is 2.7 × 1014 m from the black hole. (i) Show that the change in gravitational potential between the closest and most distant points in this orbit is about 3 × 1013 J kg−1. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Turn over 19 (ii) At its point of closest approach, the star is travelling at a speed of 8.1 × 106 m s−1. Calculate the speed of S0-2 at the furthest point in its orbit using the change in gravitational potential. mass of S0-2 = 2.4 × 1031 kg (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed = .................................................................... (c) Trigonometric parallax and Hubble’s law are two methods used to determine astronomical distances. Explain whether either of these methods is suitable to determine the distance to S0-2. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 17 = 11 marks)

20 18 The photographs show a wooden pop gun before and after the cork is popped. The diagram shows a cross-section through the pop gun. wooden cylinder handle air piston cylindrical cork Initially the piston is at the right-hand end of the cylinder, as shown. Then the cork is pushed into the other end of the cylinder. When the handle is pushed in, the pressure of the air in the cylinder increases. This exerts an additional force on the cork. Once the additional force is sufficient to overcome the frictional force between the cork and the cylinder, the cork is pushed out. (a) Show that the pressure of the air in the cylinder must be about 2 × 105 Pa in order to push the cork out. maximum frictional force = 8.8 N cross-sectional area of cork = 9.2 × 10−5 m2 atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 105 Pa (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 21 (b) Calculate the temperature of the gas in the cylinder at the instant the cork is expelled. volume of air in the cylinder with the handle pulled out = 1.1 × 10−5 m3 volume of air in the cylinder at the moment the cork is pushed out = 6.7 × 10−6 m3 atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 105 Pa initial temperature of air = 19 °C (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Temperature = .................................................................... (c) The formulae sheet for this paper includes the equation pV = 1 3 Nm〈c2〉 Derive the equation 1 2 m〈c2〉 = 3 2 kT (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (d) Calculate the root mean square speed of the molecules of air in the cylinder before the handle is pushed in. average mass of molecule of air = 4.8 × 10−26 kg temperature of air = 19 °C (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Root mean square speed = .................................................................... (Total for Question 18 = 9 marks)

22 19 The lens in the eye of an octopus focuses light onto the retina at the back of the eye. The octopus focuses on objects at different distances from the eye by changing the shape of the eye to move the lens closer or further from the retina. (a) (i) The power of an octopus lens is 118 D. Show that the focal length of the lens is about 8.5 mm. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) Calculate the shortest distance from the eye at which an object may be focused clearly on the retina. maximum distance from lens to retina = 2.0 cm (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Shortest distance from the eye = .................................................................... Turn over 23 (iii) The lens in the eye of an octopus is in contact with seawater. The refractive index of freshwater is less than the refractive index of seawater. Deduce what would happen to the shortest distance from the eye at which an object may be focused clearly if the octopus was in freshwater. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (iv) Calculate the speed of light in seawater. refractive index of seawater = 1.37 (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed of light in seawater = .................................................................... (b) An octopus can detect the orientation of polarised light. State what is meant by polarised light. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 19 = 11 marks)

24 20 The photograph shows a vase made of uranium glass. Uranium glass is radioactive. Uranium glass usually contains a maximum of 2% uranium. Uranium glass made in the early part of the 20th century can contain up to 25% uranium. A student carried out an investigation to determine the percentage of uranium in the glass. The student measured the count rate by placing a Geiger Muller (GM) tube against the vase at a single position. This value was used to calculate the decay rate for the whole vase. (a) (i) Show that the decay constant for uranium is about 5 × 10−18 s−1 half-life of uranium = 1.41 × 1017 s (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 25 (ii) Calculate the percentage of uranium, by mass, in the glass. area of GM tube window = 6.36 × 10−5 m2 surface area of vase = 0.0177 m2 background count rate = 525 counts in 10 minutes count rate when GM tube next to vase = 3623 counts in 5 minutes mass of vase = 149 g mass of uranium atom = 238 u (6) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Percentage of uranium = .................................................................... (iii) The uranium decays by emitting alpha particles. Criticise the method used to determine the percentage of uranium in the vase. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 26 (b) A uranium nucleus decays to thorium by emission of an alpha particle. It can be assumed that all the energy of the decay is transferred to kinetic energy of the alpha particle. Calculate the speed of the emitted alpha particle. mass of uranium nucleus = 238.0003 u mass of thorium nucleus = 233.9942 u mass of alpha particle = 4.0015 u (5) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed of alpha particle = .................................................................... (Total for Question 20 = 15 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS Every effort has been made to contact copyright holders to obtain their permission for the use of copyright material. Pearson Education Ltd. will, if notified, be happy to rectify any errors or omissions and include any such rectifications in future editions. 27 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 28 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 29 Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 30 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 31 BLANK PAGE 32 BLANK PAGE

2 Answer ALL questions in the spaces provided. 1 A student set up the apparatus shown. A length of rigid wire was held horizontally by a clamp in a uniform magnetic field of flux density B. The circuit connected to the rigid wire is also shown. rigid wire A clamp stand balance rigid wire magnets l With the switch open, the balance was set to zero. When the switch was closed a current I in the circuit was recorded by the ammeter and the reading on the balance increased. (a) The length l of wire in the magnetic field was 15.5 cm. When the current in the circuit was 4.55 A, the reading on the balance increased by 5.65 g. Calculate the magnetic flux density B in the region of the rigid wire. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... B = ....................................................... Turn over 3 (b) The student wrote the following statement “The balance could read to the nearest 0.01 g, which makes my values for the magnetic force both accurate and precise.” Comment on this statement. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

4 2 A student used a Geiger-Müller (GM) tube to determine the activity of a radium source. Radium emits α, β, and γ radiation. He positioned the source 20 cm from the GM tube, as shown, and recorded the count for 1 minute. He repeated the measurement and calculated a mean count. GM tube radium source The student recorded the following results. Count 1 Count 2 Mean count 183 178 181 (a) Criticise the student’s method for determining the count at this position. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 5 (b) From his results the student determined that the activity of the source was 3.0 Bq. Comment on his value for the activity of the source. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

6 3 Genuine crystal balls are made from clarified quartz rather than glass. A student was given a small crystal ball and wanted to know whether it was genuine. (a) The mean diameter of the crystal ball was measured to be 5.06 cm and the mass of the crystal ball was measured to be 175 g. Show that the density of the material of the crystal ball is about 2600 kg m−3. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 7 (b) The student measured the diameter of the crystal ball using vernier calipers with a resolution of 0.01 cm. She measured the mass of the crystal ball using a balance with a resolution of 1 g. The table gives the densities of clarified quartz and glass. Material Density / kg m−3 Clarified quartz 2650 Glass 2590 Determine whether the crystal ball was genuine. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

8 4 Radioactive decay is often described in textbooks as a spontaneous, random process. (a) State what is meant by spontaneous decay. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. *(b) Explain why there is an exponential decrease in the rate of decay for a sample containing a large number of unstable nuclei. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)

Turn over 9 5 A student measured the height h of a liquid column in a capillary tube. She used a travelling microscope to make measurements of the positions of the top and bottom of the liquid column. The travelling microscope consists of a simple microscope that can be moved vertically along a vernier scale. capillary tube h vernier scale eyepiece microscope liquid (a) The student used a capillary tube with an internal radius r equal to 0.10 mm and recorded the following readings from the vernier scale. Bottom of liquid column / cm Top of liquid column / cm 12.00 27.10 (i) State the uncertainty in each of these readings. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Calculate the percentage uncertainty in the student’s value of h. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Percentage uncertainty in h = ....................................................... 10 (iii) The student repeated the measurement of h for capillary tubes of different radii. The table shows the student’s final data. r / mm 1/r h / cm 0.09 11.1 16.56 0.10 10.0 15.1 0.12 8.3 12.6 0.15 6.7 10.33 Criticise the student’s recording of the data. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The student plotted the following graph. 12.0 11.0 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 1 r / mm−1 20.0 15.0 10.0 5.0 0.0 h / cm Turn over 11 (i) Determine the height of the liquid column that the student could expect for a tube with an internal radius of 0.11 mm. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Height of liquid column = ....................................................... (ii) In her notes it stated that h = k r where k is constant Assess the extent to which the student’s data supports this relationship. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

12 6 The Enterprise is an amusement park ride. Riders sit in cars that are made to rotate in a vertical circle. The ride starts by moving in a horizontal circle. The speed of rotation increases, and the frame tilts until the ride is rotating vertically as shown. The photograph below shows riders at the top of the vertical circle. The riders are in contact with their seats at all times during the ride. The diagram shows the weight W of a rider and the push P from the seat on the rider at the top and bottom of the circular path. direction of motion W P W P Forces not to scale Turn over 13 *(a) The rider moves from the bottom to the top of the circular path. Explain how the apparent weight experienced by the rider would change. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) On the website of the amusement park it states “The ride is perfectly safe without the need for safety harnesses for the riders. Centrifugal force ensures that the riders remain in their seats at all stages in the ride.” Assess the validity of this statement. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

14 7 A student connected the output from a source of alternating potential difference (p.d.) to a series resistor combination. She connected an oscilloscope across the 150 Ω resistor as shown. V 120 Ω 150 Ω oscilloscope (a) The trace obtained on the oscilloscope is shown below. (i) Determine the peak p.d. across the 150 Ω resistor. y-sensitivity of oscilloscope = 2.0 V per division (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Peak p.d. across 150 Ω resistor = ....................................................... Turn over 15 (ii) Calculate the root mean square (r.m.s.) value of the current in the circuit. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... r.m.s. value of current = ....................................................... (iii) Calculate the power dissipated in the circuit. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Power dissipated in circuit = ....................................................... (b) Another student suggested that a voltmeter would be more accurate than using an oscilloscope to determine the magnitude of the p.d. Comment on this suggestion. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 7 = 11 marks)

16 8 The apparatus shown can be used to determine a value for the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water. connection to power supply water from condensed steam conical flask cold water in heat exchanger warm water out heater flask containing water (a) In one experiment the current in the heater was 8.20 A, and the potential difference across the heater was 230 V. (i) Show that the power of the heater was about 2 kW. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) There was 0.655 kg of water in the flask at an initial temperature of 22.5 °C. The heater was switched on, and the water in the flask was heated to boiling point. Calculate the minimum time taken for the water to be heated to 100.0 °C. specific heat capacity of water = 4190 J kg−1 K−1 (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Minimum time taken for water to be heated = ....................................................... Turn over 17 (b) The heater was left on and water continued to boil in the flask. The water was allowed to boil for a few minutes. The conical flask was then placed under the heat exchanger and water was collected in it. (i) Give a reason why the water was left boiling for a few minutes before the conical flask was put in place. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Water with a mass of 95.0 g was collected in a time of 125 s. Calculate the rate of energy transfer in the heat exchanger. specific latent heat of vaporisation of water = 2.26 × 106 J kg−1 (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Rate of energy transfer in the heat exchanger = ....................................................... (iii) Discuss your answers to (a)(i) and (b)(ii). (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18 (c) State how the apparatus could be modified to minimise the effect of a significant source of error. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

Turn over 19 9 A Hertzsprung-Russell (HR) diagram shows how the luminosity L depends on the surface temperature T for a group of stars. The HR diagram below is for a young star cluster. L T (a) (i) Explain how we can tell that the young star cluster is in the early stages of its evolution. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) Explain why the most massive stars in the cluster have the greatest luminosities. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 20 (b) The HR diagram on the previous page shows an approximately linear relationship for stars in this cluster. (i) It is suggested that the relationship between luminosity L and surface temperature T is of the form L = kT n where k and n are constants. Explain why a graph of log L against log T would give a straight line. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The table shows data for stars in this cluster. L / LSun T / K 39.5 10 600 545 16 400 20 600 26 800 535 000 44 900 1 770 000 53 300 Plot a graph of log L against log T on the grid opposite. Use the columns provided to show any processed data. (5) (iii) Determine a value for n. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... n = ....................................................... Turn over 21 (Total for Question 9 = 15 marks) 22 BLANK PAGE

Turn over 23 10 A student investigated the behaviour of a spring under tension. The spring was hung vertically with a mass holder attached as shown. metre rule spring mass holder (a) The student measured the length of the spring as he added masses to the holder. The rule was held as shown to measure the distance between the top and bottom coils of the spring. He determined the extension for each value of total mass on the holder. He did this by subtracting the original length of the spring from each extended length. (i) Explain whether this method would produce accurate values for the extensions of the spring. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 (ii) Explain how the student could modify his method in order to obtain more accurate values for the extensions of the spring. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) In another experiment, the student displaced the mass vertically each time a mass was added to the spring. He used a stopwatch to determine the period of vertical oscillations of each mass. The student used his data to plot a graph of T 2 against m as shown. 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 m / kg T 2 / s2 Turn over 25 The student expected the graph to be a straight line through the origin. He thought that there may be systematic error due to reaction time. (i) Give an example of another possible systematic error in this experiment. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) Another student suggests that to reduce the uncertainty in the value for the period, a data logger connected to a light gate could be used to measure time. Comment on the student’s suggestion. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (iii) Determine a value for the stiffness of the spring. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Stiffness of spring = ....................................................... 26 (c) When determining the period of oscillation for each mass, the student measured the time for 20 oscillations. He repeated this measurement to obtain a mean time for 20 oscillations. Explain how the student’s procedure contributed to the accuracy of the measurement. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 10 = 19 marks) Turn over 27 BLANK PAGE

28 11 Light from a laser pointer was passed through a diffraction grating. The light was perpendicular to the diffraction grating as shown. A diffraction pattern was produced on a screen. laser pointer screen x θ1 D diffraction grating The distance between the first order maximum and the central maximum of the diffraction pattern was x. The distance between the diffraction grating and the screen was D. (a) Distance x was measured to be 0.500 m with a metre rule. The wavelength of light λ1 from the laser pointer was 650 nm. The laser pointer was replaced with one that produced light of a different wavelength. The new distance x was measured to be 0.400 m. D = 1.45 m Calculate the wavelength λ2 of the light emitted by the replacement laser pointer. (5) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... λ2 = ....................................................... 29 (b) Explain one modification to this method that would decrease the uncertainty in the calculated value of λ2. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) In another experiment, the light from the laser pointer was not quite perpendicular to the screen. Explain how this would change the diffraction pattern produced on the screen. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 10 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 120 MARKS 30 List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input 31 Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 32 Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 33 Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 34 BLANK PAGE 35 BLANK PAGE 36 BLANK PAGE

4   6 The graph shows how the potential V varies with distance d in an electric field. V d Which of the following shows the corresponding variation in electric field strength E? E d E d A B E d E d C D (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark) 7 Which of the following quantities is a vector? A charge B mass C momentum D time (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) Turn over 5   8 A point object has a charge +Q. Which of the following diagrams shows equipotential lines differing by a constant potential difference, and electric field lines around the object? A B C D (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark) 6   Questions 9 and 10 refer to the information below. Alpha particle scattering investigations were first carried out in the early part of the 20th century. 9 An alpha particle with initial kinetic energy 8.8 × 10−13 J approaches a nucleus of a gold (197 79Au) atom. Which of the following is an equation for the closest distance r, in metres, between the alpha particle and the nucleus? A r = 8.99 × 109 2 1 6 10 79 1 6 10 8 8 10 19 19 13 × × × × × ×     − − − . . . B r = 2 1 6 10 197 1 6 10 8 99 10 8 8 10 19 19 9 13 × × × × × × × × − − − . . . . C r = 8.99 × 109 8 8 10 4 1 6 10 79 1 6 10 13 19 19 . . . × × × × × ×     − − − D r = 8.99 × 109 2 79 8 8 10 13 × ×     − . (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark) 10 Which of the following conclusions could not be made as a result of these investigations? A The atom is mostly empty space. B The atom is neutral. C The nucleus is charged. D The nucleus is very small compared to the atom. (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark) Turn over 7   11 A student drives a go‑kart up a slope. (a) The slope is at an angle of 5.7° to the horizontal. The go‑kart moves with a constant velocity of 2.8 m s−1. Calculate the power of the go‑kart. mass of go‑kart and driver = 60 kg resistive force on the go‑kart = 18 N (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Power = ....................................................... (b) The go‑kart is powered by a battery connected to a motor. The rate of thermal energy transfer by the wiring in the motor is 55 W. Calculate the resistance of the wiring in the motor. current in motor = 24 A (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Resistance of the wiring in the motor = ....................................................... (Total for Question 11 = 6 marks) 8   12 The photograph shows a cyclist cycling at a constant velocity on horizontal ground. (a) Complete the free‑body force diagram to show the four forces acting on the bicycle. Treat the bicycle and cyclist as a single object. One force has been added for you. (3) friction force on rear wheel (b) The cyclist stops pedalling and comes to rest in a time of 5.2 s. (i) Sketch a graph to show how the cyclist’s velocity changes during this time. Assume the deceleration is constant. (2) Velocity Time Turn over 9   (ii) The cyclist travels 7.80 m while coming to rest. Calculate the average resistive force on the cyclist and bicycle. mass of cyclist and bicycle = 28.0 kg (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Average resistive force = ....................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 9 marks)

10   13 A ‘tennis trainer’ consists of a tennis ball suspended by a string from the top of a vertical pole. When the ball is hit it travels in a horizontal circle around the pole, as shown in both the photograph and the diagram. string tennis ball 1.2 m vertical pole The radius of the path of the ball is 1.2 m and the speed of the ball is 3.8 m s−1. Deduce whether these values are consistent with the angle between the string and the vertical pole shown in the photograph. ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 13 = 5 marks) Turn over 11   BLANK PAGE 12   14 Power supplies provide either alternating or direct currents and potential differences. (a) A power supply produces an alternating potential difference (p.d.). The p.d. has a period of 0.02 s and a peak value of 4.0 V. (i) Calculate the frequency of the supply. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Frequency = ....................................................... (ii) Calculate the root‑mean‑square p.d. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Root‑mean‑square p.d. = ....................................................... (b) It is possible to convert alternating currents and p.d.s, to direct currents and p.d.s using diodes. The power supply provides an input Vin to the circuit shown. The circuit includes four diodes D1, D2, D3 and D4 and a resistor R. The circuit produces an output potential difference Vout . D1 D4 D3 D2 R Y X Vin Vout A graph of Vin against time and a corresponding graph of Vout against time are shown below. Vin Vout Time Time Turn over 13   (i) Explain the operation of this circuit. Your answer should refer to D1, D2, D3 and D4. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) A capacitor is added between points X and Y in the circuit. The new graph of Vout against time is shown below. Vout / V 4 3 2 1 0 30 20 10 0 Time / ms Determine a value for the capacitance of the capacitor. resistance of R = 2.2 kΩ (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Capacitance = ....................................................... (Total for Question 14 = 8 marks) 14   15 A series of experiments was carried out in the 1970s to investigate the structure of protons using the linac at Stanford, USA. *(a) Explain how an electron is accelerated in a linac. (6) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (b) The electron leaves the accelerator with a high energy. Explain why electrons need high energies to investigate the structure of a proton. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Turn over 15   (c) An electron leaves the accelerator with a momentum of 20 GeV / c. (i) Explain, with reference to base units, why GeV / c can be used as a unit of momentum. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) An electron with initial momentum 20 GeV / c collides with a stationary proton. After the collision the electron is deflected by an angle of 20° as shown and its momentum is 9.1 GeV / c. The momentum of the proton after the collision is 11.9 GeV / c. 20° initial direction of electron proton Deduce whether the law of conservation of momentum is obeyed. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (iii) The collisions between electrons and the protons in these experiments are sometimes inelastic. State what is meant by an inelastic collision. (1) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 15 = 14 marks) 16   16 A device called a clutch can be used to connect a motor to a load. The diagram shows a design called an eddy current clutch. motor magnet copper disc plastic disc Side view motor magnet copper disc plastic disc load Several magnets are embedded in the plastic disc and it is rotated by the motor. (a) (i) Explain why a current is induced in the copper disc when the motor is switched on. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) Explain, using Lenz’s law, why the copper disc rotates. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Turn over 17   (b) The motor rotates at 500 revolutions per minute. Calculate the angular speed ω of the motor. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ω = ....................................................... (c) The table shows how the turning effect exerted on a load varies with ω for a particular distance between the copper disc and the plastic disc. ω / rad s−1 Turning effect / N cm 52.4 1.0 104.7 2.0 157.1 2.8 Explain the trend shown by the data. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 16 = 11 marks)

18   17 A cosmic ray, consisting of a fast‑moving proton, collides with a proton within the nucleus of an atom in the upper atmosphere. Three particles, a proton, a neutron and a pion result from the collision. (a) Write a particle equation for this collision. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (b) The table shows the properties of two quarks. Quark Charge / e u +2 / 3 d −1 / 3 Give the quark structure for each of the particles produced by this collision. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (c) The mass of a pion is 140 MeV / c2 . Calculate the mass of the pion in kg. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Mass = ....................................................... kg Turn over 19   (d) The mass of a neutron is about the same as the mass of a proton. A student suggests that the minimum kinetic energy the cosmic ray proton would need to create the pion in this collision is 140 MeV. Discuss whether this suggestion is correct. Your answer should include reference to the laws of conservation of momentum and conservation of energy. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 17 = 12 marks) 20   18 A potential divider circuit may contain a component known as a potentiometer. One type of potentiometer consists of a track with terminals X and Y at either end. There is a sliding contact that can move along the track connected to a terminal Z as shown. t 5.0 mm end view of track track 5.0 mm 115 mm Z sliding contact Y X The length of the track is 115 mm and the width is 5.0 mm. (a) The resistance of the track between terminal X and terminal Y is 12.0 kΩ. Calculate the thickness t of the track. resistivity of track material = 0.49 Ω m (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... t = ....................................................... Turn over 21   (b) The potentiometer is used to monitor the displacement of a moving tool on a machine in a production line. The tool is attached to the sliding contact. The potentiometer is connected to a resistor of resistance R and a potential difference is applied as shown. The tool moves through a maximum displacement of 60 mm from end X, producing a maximum potential difference of 5.0 V between Z and X. 12 V 0 V Z X Y R (i) Show that the potential difference between X and Y is about 10 V. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (ii) Calculate the value of R. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... R = ....................................................... 22   (iii) When the circuit is assembled, using the correctly calculated resistance value and a battery of e.m.f. 12 V, it is found that the maximum output from the potentiometer is slightly less than 5.0 V. Explain why the maximum output is slightly less than predicted. (3) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (iv) The tool on the machine should not travel with a speed any larger than 0.8 m s−1 . The graph shows how the displacement varies with time for the downward stroke of the moving tool. Displacement / mm Time / s 0.2 0.1 0 60 23   Deduce whether this speed is exceeded by the moving tool. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 18 = 15 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS 24   List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input Turn over 25   Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 26   Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 27   Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 28   BLANK PAGE

4   6 In a particular radioactive decay, there is a mass decrease equivalent to 0.05 u. Which of the following expressions gives the energy released in MeV? A 0 05 1 66 10 3 10 1 6 10 27 8 2 19 . . . B 0 05 1 67 10 3 10 1 6 10 27 8 2 19 . . . C 0 05 1 66 10 3 10 1 6 10 27 8 2 13 . . . D 0 05 1 67 10 3 10 1 6 10 27 8 2 13 . . . (Total for Question 6 = 1 mark) 7 Air is trapped in a glass tube. When the air is forced into a smaller volume at a constant temperature, the pressure increases. Which of the following statements about air molecules is a reason why the pressure the trapped air exerts on the tube increases? A The molecules have a greater mean kinetic energy. B The molecules make more frequent collisions with each other. C The molecules make more frequent collisions with the walls of the tube. D The molecules experience a greater change in momentum when they collide with the tube. (Total for Question 7 = 1 mark) Turn over 5   8 Total internal reflection occurs when light is incident on the boundary between medium 1 and medium 2, as shown. medium 2 medium 1 θ θ The refractive index of medium 1 is n1 and the refractive index of medium 2 is n2. The critical angle for the boundary is C. Which row of the table is correct? A B C D θ < C n1 > n2 θ < C n2 > n1 θ > C n1< n2 θ > C n2 < n1 (Total for Question 8 = 1 mark)

6   9 The focal length and power of a converging glass lens are determined for the lens in air. The lens is then immersed in water. Which row in the table shows how the focal length and power of the lens change? A B C D Focal length Power of lens decreases decreases decreases increases increases decreases increases increases (Total for Question 9 = 1 mark) 10 A student used a Geiger-Müller (GM) tube to determine a value for the background count. He recorded the count for 2 minutes, every 15 minutes, as shown in the table. Time / min Count for 2 min 0 34 15 39 30 28 The counts are not the same. Which of the following is the reason for this? A The background count rate is random. B The counter is incorrectly calibrated. C The temperature has not stayed constant. D There is a systematic error in the measurement. (Total for Question 10 = 1 mark) Turn over 7   11 The lens of a mobile phone camera has a focal length of 4.25 mm. Light is focused onto light sensors at the back of the camera, as shown. lens light sensors (a) The camera is initially focused on an object in the far distance. Calculate the displacement of the lens that would be required to focus on an object 25.0 cm from the camera. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Displacement of lens = ...................................................... (b) State why the lens and the light sensors in a mobile phone camera can be positioned a fixed distance apart. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 11 = 5 marks)

8   12 In February 2021 the spacecraft Perseverance Rover landed on Mars. When the spacecraft was 11.0 km above the surface of Mars, parachutes opened to slow the descent. The parachutes detached from the spacecraft when it was 2.1 km above the surface of Mars. Calculate the change in gravitational potential energy of the spacecraft during the parachute section of its descent. mass of spacecraft = 1030 kg mass of Mars = 6.39 × 1023 kg radius of Mars = 3390 km .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Change in gravitational potential energy of the spacecraft = ...................................................... (Total for Question 12 = 3 marks) Turn over 9   13 Actinium-225 and bismuth-210 are radioactive isotopes. A sample of each isotope is prepared so that each sample has the same number of nuclei initially. Explain why the activity of each sample would be the same after 10 days. half-life of actinium-225 = 10 days half-life of bismuth-210 = 5 days .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 4 marks)

10   14 The diagram shows the spectra produced by two stars. Spectrum A is produced from the light from the Sun and spectrum B is produced from the light from a distant star. 400 500 600 700 Spectrum A Spectrum B λ / nm The dark lines are produced when light from the core of the star is absorbed by hydrogen atoms in the outer regions of the star. Light is then re-radiated, but in all directions, giving rise to the dark lines in the spectrum. (a) Explain why the long wavelength lines are shifted by a greater amount than the short wavelength lines. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) One of the lines in the hydrogen spectrum occurs at a wavelength of 656 nm in the laboratory. Explain what conclusion can be made from the shift in wavelength of this line in spectrum B. Your answer should include a calculation. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 14 = 6 marks) Turn over 11   15 Aluminium is one of the most widely recycled metals. Aluminium cans are heated from room temperature until all the aluminium has melted. The molten aluminium is then used to make new cans. This process uses only 5% of the energy needed to extract aluminium from raw materials. On a website it is claimed that recycling one aluminium can of mass 14 g saves enough energy to listen to music on a mobile phone continuously for 7 days. Assess the validity of this claim. melting point of aluminium = 660 K specific heat capacity of aluminium = 902 J kg−1 K−1 specific latent heat of aluminium = 396 kJ kg−1 room temperature = 293 K mobile phone p.d. = 3.7 V mobile phone current = 120 mA .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 15 = 6 marks)

12   16 In an investigation of the photoelectric effect, electromagnetic radiation of frequency f was directed onto a metal plate. The maximum kinetic energy E of the photoelectrons emitted from the metal plate was determined. The procedure was repeated for a range of frequencies. The graph shows how E depended upon f. 2.0 1.5 1.0 0.5 0.0 50 110 100 90 80 70 60 f / 1013 Hz E / eV (a) Determine a value for the Planck constant, h, in J s. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. h = ...................................................... J s Turn over 13   (b) The table gives data for different metal surfaces. Metal surface Work function / eV Caesium 2.0 Calcium 2.9 Magnesium 3.7 Deduce which metal was being used in the investigation. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 16 = 7 marks)

14   17 A simple astronomical refracting telescope consists of two converging lenses. Light from a star is brought to a focus by the objective lens and then viewed through an eyepiece lens as shown. objective lens eyepiece lens light from a star (a) (i) In the arrangement shown, the final image is formed at infinity. Explain why the separation of the objective and eyepiece lenses is equal to the sum of their focal lengths. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) State why the final image is inverted. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 15   (b) Glass lenses used for optical instruments often have an anti-reflective coating. The coating is a thin layer of a transparent substance with refractive index nc. Light is reflected from the coating surface and from the lens surface as shown. The reflected light interferes destructively. light reflected from lens light reflected from coating coating lens When a single-layer coating is used, the coating thickness is chosen to eliminate reflections for green light, which is in the middle of the visible spectrum. (i) Calculate the minimum thickness d of the coating required for the reflection of green light to be eliminated. frequency of green light = 6.00 × 1014 Hz nc = 1.38 (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. d = ...................................................... 16   (ii) State why white light reflected from coated lenses is seen as purple. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 17 = 8 marks) Turn over 17   18 The harp is a musical instrument with many strings, as shown. (Source: © Peter Voronov/Shutterstock) All the strings are under tension. The strings on one type of harp are made from nylon of density 1070 kg m−3. One string has a diameter of 1.14 mm. (a) (i) Show that the mass per unit length μ of the string is about 1.1 × 10−3 kg m−1. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18   (ii) When the middle of the string is plucked, a note of frequency 440 Hz is produced. Calculate the tension in the string. length of string = 41.0 cm (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Tension in string = ...................................................... Turn over 19   (b) The graph shows how the Young modulus E of the nylon varies with temperature. 0 30 25 20 15 10 5 Temperature / °C E When the harp is played, the temperature of the string increases. Explain how this temperature change would affect the frequency of the note produced when the string is plucked. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 18 = 9 marks)

20   19 A fine-beam tube is used for investigating properties of electrons. An electron beam is produced inside a spherical glass bulb. The bulb contains neon gas at a very low pressure. (a) The neon gas is at a pressure of 1.25 Pa and a temperature of 25 °C. Calculate the number N of neon atoms inside the bulb. bulb diameter = 16.0 cm (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. N = ...................................................... Turn over 21   *(b) Interactions between electrons and the neon atoms in the tube make the beam visible. Part of the spectrum of visible light produced by these interactions is shown. (Source: © MoFarouk/Shutterstock) Explain the process that results in the emission of this spectrum. Your answer should include reference to energy levels in atoms. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 19 = 10 marks)

22   20 A garden ornament consists of a metal flamingo suspended from a spring as shown. The spring is hung from a support using the hook. flamingo hook spring (a) The mass of the flamingo is 65 g. When the flamingo is suspended vertically the spring extends by 8.5 cm. The flamingo is pulled downwards by a small extra displacement and then released. The flamingo undergoes simple harmonic motion vertically. The instructions state that the flamingo will oscillate with a frequency of 2.5 Hz. Deduce whether this statement is correct. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 23   (b) After being set into vertical oscillation, the flamingo comes to rest after a short time. Explain why the flamingo comes to rest. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (c) In a slight breeze the flamingo swings from side to side and behaves as a simple pendulum. (i) Show that the period of oscillation of the flamingo pendulum is about 2.2 s. pendulum length = 1.25 m (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The amplitude of oscillation of the flamingo pendulum is 7.5 cm. Calculate the maximum velocity of the flamingo pendulum. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Maximum velocity = ...................................................... (Total for Question 20 = 12 marks)

24   21 A hundred years ago, a method to determine the age of certain rocks was developed. An unstable isotope of rubidium is present in some rocks when they form. Over time the rubidium decays to a stable isotope of strontium. (a) Rubidium decays to strontium via β− decay. Complete the nuclear equation representing the decay. 37 .............Rb → 87 .............Sr + ............. .............β− + ν– e (2) (b) A sample of Moon rock from the Apollo 11 mission was analysed to determine the age of the rock. When the sample was analysed the number of rubidium atoms was NR and the number of strontium atoms was NS. As strontium atoms have all been produced from the decay of rubidium, the original number of rubidium atoms in the sample was (NR + NS ). From the analysis of the sample, it was determined that N N S R = 0.0532 Deduce whether this ratio is consistent with the Earth and the Moon forming at the same time. age of Earth = 4.5 × 109 years half-life of rubidium isotope = 4.88 × 1010 years (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25   (c) Give a reason why the half-life of the rubidium isotope is hard to determine. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (d) Recent investigations suggest that the half-life of the rubidium isotope may be larger than the traditionally accepted value. Explain how this would affect the ages obtained by this dating method. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 21 = 10 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 90 MARKS 26   List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s =  (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g =  F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P =  W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency =  useful power output total power input Turn over 27   Electric circuits Potential difference V =  W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R =  ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ =  m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ =  F A Strain ε = Δ x x E =  σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I =  P A Power of a lens P =  1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u  +  1 v  =  1 f Magnification for a lens m =  image height object height =  v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 28   Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek =  p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma =  mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F =  Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E =  F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E =  V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E =  −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms =  V0 √2 Ir ms =  I0 √2 29   Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r =  p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I =  L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt  = −λN λ =  ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f  =  2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 30   BLANK PAGE 31   BLANK PAGE 32   BLANK PAGE

4   2 A student was given a box of identical glass microscope slides and asked to determine the density of the glass. She used a micrometer to measure the thickness of one of the slides. She repeated this measurement twice in different places and calculated a mean value for the thickness. The thickness of each slide was approximately 1 mm. (a) Explain how she should have measured the thickness of the slides in order to minimise the percentage uncertainty. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) In her report she wrote “My value for the mass of the glass slides was precise, because I measured the mass using an electronic balance which was accurate to the nearest 0.01 g. I reduced the effect of random error by repeating the measurement several times.” Comment on this statement. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 2 = 6 marks) Turn over 5   3 It was suggested on an online forum that it would be possible to cook a chicken by repeatedly slapping the chicken with one hand. It was claimed that the energy transferred to a chicken in 8000 slaps would be sufficient to raise the temperature of the chicken from 23 °C to 165 °C. In an investigation to test the claim, the effective mass of the hand was taken as 1.75 kg and the speed of the hand just before impact with the chicken as 6.25 m s−1. (a) Deduce whether the data confirms that 8000 slaps would be sufficient. Assume that no energy is transferred from the chicken to the surroundings. mass of chicken = 0.875 kg specific heat capacity of chicken = 1770 J kg−1 K−1 efficiency of energy transfer from the hand = 65% (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) Explain whether the assumption made in (a) is realistic. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 3 = 7 marks)

6   4 The diagram shows a metronome, which includes an inverted pendulum, used by musicians to set a tempo. The pendulum oscillates with simple harmonic motion and makes a loud click at regular intervals. pendulum (Source: Getty Images) A faulty metronome stopped making a clicking noise. A student tried to check the accuracy of the period T of the metronome, using a stopwatch. The student timed the pendulum as it moved from one extreme of the oscillation to the other. Explain how the procedure used by the student to determine T could have been improved. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 4 = 5 marks) Turn over 7   BLANK PAGE 8   *5 The diagram shows a ‘shaker torch’. When the torch is shaken, a strong magnet moves forwards and backwards through a copper coil, powering a light-emitting diode (LED). connection to circuit rubber stopper plastic tube coil magnet rubber stopper N S Each time the magnet moves through the coil a current pulse is generated. The coil is connected to a capacitor via a diode, as shown. connection to coil Once the torch has been shaken for a few minutes the switch is closed and the LED lights for a short while. Turn over 9   Explain how the shaker torch is able to light the LED. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 5 = 6 marks)

10   6 In an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air a student connected two microphones to an oscilloscope, as shown. oscilloscope signal generator loudspeaker microphone 2 microphone 1 d The microphones detect sound from the loudspeaker, converting it to an electrical signal. The signal is displayed on the oscilloscope screen. Both microphones were initially positioned the same distance from the loudspeaker. The two signals were in phase on the oscilloscope screen. The student slowly moved microphone 2 towards the loudspeaker, until the two signals on the oscilloscope were in phase again. He then measured the distance d between the microphones to determine the wavelength λ of the sound waves. d = 20.5 cm (a) Comment on the student’s experimental technique to determine λ. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 11   (b) The oscilloscope trace for the signal from microphone 1 is shown below. The time base of the oscilloscope was set to 0.20 ms div−1. Determine a value for the speed of sound in air. (5) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Speed of sound = ....................................................... (Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

12   7 A projectile of mass 65 g is fired vertically upwards into a stationary wooden block of mass 2.400 kg, as shown. wooden block projectile (a) The projectile becomes embedded in the block. They both move vertically upwards through a vertical displacement of 55 cm before momentarily coming to rest. Calculate the energy dissipated as the projectile hits the block. (6) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Energy dissipated = ....................................................... Turn over 13   (b) Explain how the principle of conservation of energy applies to this collision. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 7 = 8 marks)

14   8 A teacher demonstrated the decay of protactinium using a Geiger-Müller (GM) tube connected to a data logger. A sealed plastic bottle contains a solvent floating above a liquid containing a uranium salt. Protactinium is produced from the decay of uranium and is present in the solvent as shown. GM tube sealed plastic bottle liquid containing uranium solvent containing protactinium to data logger (a) Deduce whether alpha radiation or beta radiation from the inside of the bottle is detected by the GM tube. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The data logger output is shown below. 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 t / s Count rate / s−1 Turn over 15   (i) Determine the half-life of the protactinium. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Half-life of protactinium = ....................................................... (ii) Explain why the count rate doesn’t reach zero. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... (Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

16   9 A student is planning to collect data to produce a current-potential difference graph for a filament lamp. Her teacher suggests two circuits that she could use. Circuit 1 Circuit 2 A V A V Circuit 1 uses a potential divider and circuit 2 uses a variable resistor to vary the potential difference across the filament lamp. *(a) Discuss the suitability of each circuit to collect the data. (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 17   (b) The student sets up the following circuit with the filament lamp. The battery has negligible internal resistance. 12 V 560 Ω A (i) The reading on the ammeter is 17.5 mA. Calculate the value of the potential difference (p.d.) across the filament lamp. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... p.d. across filament lamp = ....................................................... (ii) When a voltmeter with a resistance of 1.5 kΩ is connected as shown, the p.d. across the filament lamp decreases. 12 V 560 Ω A V Explain why the p.d. across the filament lamp decreases. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

18   10 A student carried out an experiment to determine the viscosity of some honey. He filled a tall glass cylinder with honey as shown, and timed a ball bearing as it fell through the honey. cylinder rubber band honey ball bearing rubber band (a) The student placed rubber bands near the top and bottom of the cylinder. He started a stopwatch when the ball bearing passed the first band and stopped the stopwatch when the ball bearing passed the second band. He repeated this several times to determine a mean time. Criticise the student’s method. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (b) The time t for the sphere to fall through a distance of 25.0 cm is shown in the table. t / s 6.40 6.35 6.36 6.38 (i) Show that the mean velocity v of the ball bearing is about 0.04 m s−1. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 19   (ii) The student had three different types of honey available. Viscosity η is given by the following expression η = ( ) 2 B H 2 9 r g ρ ρ v − radius r of ball bearing = 5.50 × 10−3 m density of ball bearing ρB = 7750 kg m−3 density of honey ρH = 1360 kg m−3 Viscosity (at 20 °C) / Pa s Honey A Honey B Honey C 10.6 12.5 13.6 Deduce which honey the student used. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 10 = 7 marks)

20   11 A student carried out an experiment to calibrate a thermistor. She connected the thermistor in series with a resistor and a power supply as shown. Then she placed the thermistor in a beaker of hot water and used a thermometer to record the temperature θ of the water. V to circuit thermometer water beaker thermistor The student recorded θ and corresponding values of the reading V on the voltmeter as the water cooled. (a) Explain, making reference to charge carriers, why V increased as the water cooled. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 21   (b) Over a limited temperature range V varies with θ according to the expression V = V0e−bθ where b and V0 are constants. (i) Explain why a graph of ln V against θ would give a straight line. (2) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22   (ii) The student’s data is shown in the table below. θ / °C V / V 89.0 1.9 74.0 2.9 53.5 4.9 32.5 9.1 18.5 12.6 3.5 18.7 Plot a graph of ln V against θ on the grid opposite. Use the column provided to show any processed data. (5) (iii) Determine values for b and V0. (4) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... b = ....................................................... V0 = ....................................................... Turn over 23   (Total for Question 11 = 14 marks)

24   12 In 2011, a tsunami was caused by a massive earthquake centred some distance off the coast of Japan. The tsunami caused a cooling system failure at the Fukushima Nuclear Power Plant. This resulted in a nuclear meltdown and radioactive materials were released into the surroundings. (a) A reservoir beside one of the reactor buildings contained a large volume of water. In 2013, this water was found to have an extremely high concentration of caesium-137. Caesium-137 is a radioactive isotope of caesium. (i) Complete the nuclear equation for the decay of caesium-137. 137 55Cs → ............. .............Ba + ............. .............β− + 0 0νe̅ (2) (ii) An activity of 2.35 × 1012 Bq per m3 of water in the reservoir was measured. It is suggested that a safe level for the activity of all water in the reservoir would be 100 Bq. Calculate the time in years for the caesium-137 to decay to a safe level. volume of water in reservoir = 5000 m3 half-life of caesium-137 = 30 years (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Time = ....................................................... years Turn over 25   (b) The most common radionuclide amongst the fission products in the fuel was iodine-131, which decays with a half-life of 8.0 days to form a stable isotope of the gas xenon. Deduce whether enough xenon would have collected in 32 days to exert a pressure of 1.0 × 105 Pa in a volume of 450 m3. Assume that no gas escapes. temperature = 20 °C initial number of iodine nuclei = 1.25 × 1028 (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 26   (c) Buildings in nearby Tohoku University suffered structural damage during the 2011 earthquake. The graph shows how the acceleration of one of the buildings, measured on the 9th floor, varied with time during the earthquake. 90 88 86 84 82 80 t / s 10 5 0 −5 −10 a / m s−2 (Source: https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0038080612001035) At the time it was reported that during the earthquake the 9th floor of the building displaced by more than 30 cm from its normal position. Assess the accuracy of this report. (5) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 12 = 17 marks) Turn over 27   13 A student used a sonometer to investigate the properties of a stretched wire. The sonometer is a long hollow wooden box. A steel wire is attached to one end of the box and rests on two wooden bridges. The wire is placed under tension T by hanging a mass from the end of the wire, as shown. wire pulley mass wooden bridges bench sonometer L The student placed the base of a vibrating tuning fork in contact with the wire, at one of the bridges. This set the wire into oscillation. He adjusted the position of the other bridge until a single-loop standing wave was produced on the wire between the bridges. (a) Explain how an antinode is produced at the mid-point of the wire between the bridges. (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28   (b) The student repeated this for a series of tuning forks with different frequencies f. For each fork he measured the distance L between the bridges. The steel wire, of mass per unit length μ, was placed under tension T by hanging a mass of 2.10 kg from the end of the wire. (i) State one safety precaution that should be taken when carrying out the investigation. (1) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (ii) The student plotted a graph of L2 against 1/f 2. Show that the gradient of this graph is equal to 4 T μ (3) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Turn over 29   (iii) The student’s graph is shown below. 14.0 12.0 10.0 8.0 6.0 4.0 2.0 0.0 1 / f 2 / 10−6 s2 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 0.00 L2 / m2 The value of μ for different standard wire gauge (SWG) steel wire is shown in the table. SWG μ / g m−1 22 3.15 24 1.95 26 1.31 Deduce which wire the student used in the investigation. (4) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30   (c) The student then found a value of μ for a brass wire, using a different method. (i) He measured the diameter d of the wire using a micrometer. Explain one technique the student should use when measuring d. (2) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31   (ii) The student obtained the following data. d / mm 0.55 0.59 0.57 0.58 The stated value of μ for the brass wire used by the student was 2.14 × 10−3 kg m−1. Deduce whether the student’s data supports this value for μ. density of brass = 8700 kg m−3 ± 200 kg m−3 (6) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Total for Question 13 = 19 marks) TOTAL FOR PAPER = 120 MARKS 32   List of data, formulae and relationships Acceleration of free fall g = 9.81 m s−2 (close to Earth’s surface) Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10−23 J K−1 Coulomb law constant k = 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 N m2 C−2 Electron charge e = −1.60 × 10−19 C Electron mass me = 9.11 × 10−31 kg Electronvolt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10−19 J Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10−11 N m2 kg−2 Gravitational field strength g = 9.81 N kg−1 (close to Earth’s surface) Permittivity of free space ε0 = 8.85 × 10−12 F m−1 Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10−34 J s Proton mass mp = 1.67 × 10−27 kg Speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s−1 Stefan-Boltzmann constant σ = 5.67 × 10−8 W m−2 K−4 Unified atomic mass unit u = 1.66 × 10−27 kg Mechanics Kinematic equations of motion s = (u + v)t 2 v = u + at s = ut + 1 2 at2 v2 = u2 + 2as Forces ∑F = ma g = F m W = mg moment of force = Fx Momentum p = mv Work, energy and power ΔW = FΔs Ek = 1 2 mv2 ΔEgrav = mgΔh P = E t P = W t efficiency = useful energy output total energy input efficiency = useful power output total power input Turn over 33   Electric circuits Potential difference V = W Q Resistance R = V I Electrical power and energy P = VI P = I 2R P = V 2 R W = VIt Resistivity R = ρl A Current I = ΔQ Δt I = nqvA Materials Density ρ = m V Stokes’ law F = 6πηrv Hooke’s law ΔF = kΔ x Young modulus Stress σ = F A Strain ε = Δ x x E = σ ε Elastic strain energy ΔEel = 1 2 FΔ x Waves and particle nature of light Wave speed v = f λ Speed of a transverse wave on a string v = T μ Intensity of radiation I = P A Power of a lens P = 1 f P = P1 + P2 + P3 + … Thin lens equation 1 u + 1 v = 1 f Magnification for a lens m = image height object height = v u Diffraction grating nλ = d sin θ Refractive index n1 sin θ1 = n2 sin θ2 n = c v Critical angle sin C = 1 n Photon model E = h f Einstein’s photoelectric equation hf = ϕ + 1 2 mv2 max de Broglie wavelength λ = h p 34   Further mechanics Impulse FΔt = Δp Kinetic energy of a non-relativistic particle Ek = p2 2m Motion in a circle v = ωr T = 2π ω F = ma = mv2 r a = v2 r a = rω2 F = mrω2 Fields Coulomb’s law F = Q1Q2 4πε0r2 Electric field strength E = F Q E = Q 4πε0r2 E = V d Electric potential V = Q 4πε0r Capacitance C = Q V Energy stored in a capacitor W = 1 2 QV W = 1 2 CV 2 W = 1 2 Q 2 C Capacitor discharge Q = Q0e−t/RC I = I0e−t/RC V = V0e−t/RC ln Q = ln Q0 −  t RC ln I = ln I0 −  t RC ln V = ln V0 −  t RC In a magnetic field F = BIl sin θ F = Bqv sin θ Faraday’s and Lenz’s laws E = −d(Nϕ) dt Root-mean-square values Vr ms = V0 √2 Ir ms = I0 √2 35   Nuclear and particle physics In a magnetic field r = p BQ Thermodynamics Heating ΔE = mcΔθ ΔE = LΔm Molecular kinetic theory 1 2 mác2ñ = 3 2 kT pV = 1 3 Nmác2ñ Ideal gas equation pV = NkT Stefan-Boltzmann law L = σAT 4 L = 4πr2σT 4 Wien’s law λmaxT = 2.898 × 10−3 m K Space Intensity I = L 4πd 2 Redshift of electromagnetic radiation z = Δλ λ  ≈ Δf f  ≈ v c Cosmological expansion v = H0d Nuclear radiation Mass-energy ΔE = c2Δm Radioactive decay A = λN dN dt = −λN λ = ln 2 t½ N = N0 e−λt A = A0 e−λt Gravitational fields Gravitational force F = Gm1m2 r 2 Gravitational field strength g = Gm r 2 Gravitational potential Vgrav = −Gm r Oscillations Simple harmonic motion F = −k x a = −ω2x x = A cos ωt v = −Aω sin ωt a = ‒Aω2 cos ωt T = 1 f = 2π ω ω = 2π f Simple harmonic oscillator T = 2π m k T = 2π l g 36   BLANK PAGE

13099.01 F ­9 AVAILABLE MARKS 8 (a) (i) For a fixed mass of gas at constant temperature [1] the pressure of the gas is inversely proportional to the volume or product of p and V is constant [1] [2] (ii) A horizontal line below the original line [1] (b) P1V1 T1 P2V2 T2 = [1] 286 311 T 326 = correct pressures [1] correct temperature [1] T = 300 [1] 300 – 273 = 27 °C ecf for T [1] [5] (c) (i) KE = 3/2kT = 3/2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × 286 [1] = 5.92 × 10–21 J [1] [2] (ii) pV = nRT or Pv = NkT [1] 311 × 103 × 1.03 × 10–2 = n × 8.31 × 286 [1] n = 1.35 moles [1] 1.35 × 6.02 × 1023 = 8.11 × 1023 molecules [1] 5.92 × 10–21 × 8.11 × 1023 = 4800 J [1] Alternative use of pv = 1/3 Nm <c^2> [1] 3/2 pv = 1/2 Nm <c^2> [1] 3/2 pv = 1/2 M <c^2> [1] sub p and v [1] ans [1] [5] 15 Total 100

13099 [Turn over 6 A door performs simple harmonic motion when it is displaced and released at time t = 0. The motion of the door is damped, enabling the door to eventually come to rest in a closed position. The amount of damping can be varied. Sketch graphs to show how the displacement d of the door varies with time t in each of the following situations. The time period of the door oscillating is T. (i) The door experiences light damping. T 2T t d 0 0 [3] (ii) The door is overdamped. T 2T t d 0 0 [2] (iii) The door experiences critical damping. T 2T t d 0 0 [2] 13099 7 A spring with a spring constant k of 209 N m-1 is suspended from a fixed point and a 650 g mass is attached to its lower end. The mass is raised slightly and the position of the bottom of the mass is noted to be at the 0.270 m mark on a half-metre rule. The mass is released and at the same time a stopwatch is started. The mass oscillates between the 0.270 m and 0.310 m marks on the half-metre rule as shown in Fig. 7.1. spring 650 g half-metre rule 0.270 m 0.310 m fixed point Fig. 7.1 (a) Calculate the period of oscillation for the spring mass system. Period of oscillation =                     s [2] 13099 [Turn over (b) Calculate the maximum acceleration of the mass. Maximum acceleration =                     m s-2 [4] (c) Calculate the first time the oscillating mass passes the 0.295 m mark on the half-metre rule. Time =                     s [3] 13099 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 13099 [Turn over 8 (a) (i) The relationship between volume, pressure and temperature of an ideal gas can be described using gas laws. State the law which describes the relationship shown in Fig. 8.1 where p is the pressure and V is the volume. pV V Fig. 8.1 [2] (ii) Draw another line on Fig. 8.1 to show how the graph changes if the temperature of the gas is lower. [1] 13099 A car tyre is inflated to a pressure of 210 kPa above the atmospheric pressure of 101 kPa. The temperature of the air in the tyre is 13.0 °C. The car is taken for a long drive after which the tyre pressure increases by 15.0 kPa. Assume that the volume of the tyre remains constant. (b) Calculate the temperature of the air in the tyre at the end of the drive. Temperature                     °C [5] (c) (i) Calculate the average kinetic energy of one of the air molecules in the tyre before the long drive. Average kinetic energy of one molecule =              J [2] 13099 (ii) If the volume of the air in the tyre is 1.03 × 10−2 m3, calculate the total kinetic energy of all the air molecules in the tyre. Total kinetic energy =                     J [5] THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Total Marks Examiner Number DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE APH11/6 262817 DATA AND FORMULAE SHEET Physics [APH11/APH21] ADVANCED General Certifi cate of Education Assessment Units A2 1 and A2 2 12159.03 12159.03 2 Data and Formulae Sheet for A2 1 and A2 2 Values of constants speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1 permittivity of a vacuum ε0 = 8.85 × 10–12 F m–1 1 4πε0 = 8.99 × 109 F–1 m elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10–19 C the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s (unifi ed) atomic mass unit 1 u = 1.66 ×10–27 kg mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg molar gas constant R = 8.31 J K–1 mol–1 the Avogadro constant NA = 6.02 × 1023 mol–1 the Boltzmann constant k = 1.38 × 10–23 J K–1 gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10–11 N m2 kg–2 acceleration of free fall on the Earth’s surface g = 9.81 m s–2 electron volt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19 J the Hubble constant H0 ≈ 2.4 × 10–18 s–1 12159.03 3 Useful formulae The following equations may be useful in answering some of the questions in the examination: Mechanics conservation of energy 1 2 mv 2 – 1 2 mu 2 = Fs for a constant force Hooke’s Law F = kx (spring constant k) strain energy E = 1 2 Fx = 1 2 kx 2 Uniform circular motion centripetal Force F = mv 2 r Simple harmonic motion displacement x = A cos ωt simple pendulum T = 2π loaded spiral spring T = 2π Waves two-source interference λ = ay d diffraction grating d sin θ = n λ l g m k 12159.03 4 Thermal physics average kinetic energy of a molecule 1 2 m Gc2H = 3 2 kT kinetic theory pV = 1 3 Nm Gc2H thermal energy Q = mc∆θ Capacitors capacitors in series 1 C = 1 C1 + 1 C2 + 1 C3 capacitors in parallel C = C1 + C2 + C3 time constant τ = RC capacitor discharge Q = Q0e –t CR or V = V0e –t CR or I = I0e –t CR Light lens formula 1 u + 1 v = 1 f Electricity terminal potential difference V = E – Ir (e.m.f., E; Internal Resistance, r) potential divider Vout = R1Vin R1 + R2 a.c. generator E = BANωsinωt 12159.03 5 Nuclear Physics nuclear radius r = r0A 1 3 radioactive decay A = –λN, A = A0e–λt half-life t 1 2 = 0.693 λ Particles and photons Einstein’s equation 1 2 mvmax2 = hf – hf0 de Broglie equation λ= h p Astronomy red shift z = Δλ λ recession speed z = v c Hubble’s law v = H0 d

3 13100.03 Question 1 Requirements • plastic measuring cylinder capacity 250 ml • 2 × 500 ml beaker • 30 cm ruler reading to 0.1 cm • 2 mm drill bit and drill • sink or basin to collect water • stopclock reading to 0.01 s • vernier caliper • adhesive tape • red food colouring Preparation Drill a single 2 mm diameter hole in the measuring cylinder level with the 30 ml marking on the cylinder. Tape the ruler vertically to the outside of the measuring cylinder so that the 0 cm marking on the ruler is horizontally level with the centre of the hole as shown in Fig. 1.1. ruler hole Fig. 1.1 Place the measuring cylinder so that when fi lled the water drains into a basin/sink. Fill two 500 ml beakers with approx. 350ml of water and add a few drops of food colouring to make it easier to determine the level of water when in the measuring cylinder. Please note, spare beakers of coloured water should be available in case candidates do a trial run or wish to repeat a run. Place the stopwatch and vernier caliper next to the measuring cylinder. Action at changeover Empty the measuring cylinder, reset the stopclock, close the vernier caliper and refi ll the beaker with water and drops of food colouring. 0 cm measuring cylinder

4 13100.03 Question 2 Requirements • 1 × 820 μF capacitor > 2 V working voltage • 1 × 120 μF capacitor > 2 V working voltage • 1 × red, 1 × black 4 mm binding post panel mount • 2 × 4 mm connecting wire • white adhesive labels • SPDT switch • enclosure 85 × 60 × 40 mm or larger • 1.5 V cell • 1.5 V cell holder • digital voltmeter range 0 – 2 V reading to 0.001V Preparation Drill holes in the enclosure and mount the SPDT switch and the red and black binding posts in the front panel. Solder the capacitors inside the box so the circuit and the underside of the lid of the box will look like Fig. 2.1. black binding post + + 820μF 120μF red binding post Fig. 2.1 5 13100.03 Ensure the circuit and capacitors are sealed inside the box so that they cannot be viewed by the students. Use the white sticky labels to draw the corresponding circuit as shown in Fig. 2.2 onto the front of the box between the exposed switch and binding posts. Label position 1 and position 2 on the label as shown in the Fig 2.2. Position 1 Position 2 Switch C1 C2 Fig. 2.2 Check Turn the switch to position 2. Place two connecting wires in the red and black post bindings. Connect the wires to the +ve and –ve terminals of the 1.5 V cell. Remove the wires from the cell and attach to the voltmeter. The voltmeter should read approximately 1.5 V. Turn the switch to position 1 then back to position 2 again. The reading on the voltmeter should drop to about 87% of its original value. Setup for Practical Place the enclosure on the desk next to the voltmeter and cell inside the cell holder. Place two connecting wires in the red and black post bindings and label these wires positive and negative respectively. Ensure the SPDT switch is in position 2. Touch the positive and negative wires together to ensure C1 is fully discharged. Action at changeover Disconnect circuit from cell/voltmeter. Return switch to position 2. Touch the positive and negative wires together to ensure C1 is fully discharged. + + 6 13100.03 7 13100.03 13100.03 13100.04 ADVANCED General Certificate of Education 2022 APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST Physics Assessment Unit A2 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [APH31] FRIDAY 13 MAY, MORNING 2 13100.04 PHYSICS UNIT 3 (A2 3A) APPARATUS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR PRACTICAL ASSESSMENT CONFIDENTIAL This document gives preliminary information on the apparatus and materials required for the A2 Practical Assessment. Information about the apparatus and materials required for this assessment must NOT be communicated to students. If apparatus/materials have their serial code and/or manufacturer specifi ed then it is essential that centres use this exact apparatus/material. On receipt of this APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST, centres must contact Gavin Gray, ggray@ccea.org.uk immediately if they have difficulty in sourcing the specified apparatus or materials. Teachers will be given detailed instructions for setting up the experiment in the Confi dential Instructions for Physics Practical Test, to which they will have confi dential access from April 2022. Teachers will have confi dential access to a copy of the experimental test two working days (48 hours) before the start of the assessment. The A2 3 Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills consisting of two experimental tests (40 marks). The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. The apparatus in the following list will allow for one experiment to be set up for the practical test which makes up questions 1–2. In other words, each set of apparatus (as listed on page 3) will accommodate two candidates when doing the circus of experiments. The apparatus can be used for alternative sessions according to the following schedule: Friday 13 May 2022 Physics A2 3A (APH31) (Main Session) 9.15 am–10.15 am (First Alternative) 10.30 am–11.30 am (Second Alternative) 11.45 am–12.45 pm (Third Alternative) 1.15 pm–2.15 pm (Fourth Alternative) 2.30 pm–3.30 pm One set of apparatus for A2 3A (APH31) will therefore be suffi cient for ten candidates on Friday 13 May if the Main Session and all four alternatives are used. A laboratory may contain one, two, three or more sets of apparatus. This means that two, four, six, eight or more candidates can be accommodated in the same session. To maintain the confi dentiality of details of the practical tests, candidates entered for any of the alternative sessions must be segregated within the centre so that there can be no contact with candidates who have taken an earlier test in any centre. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Test from the suppliers as soon as possible.

3 13100.04 Question 1 Requirements • plastic measuring cylinder capacity 250 ml • 2 × 500 ml beaker • 30 cm ruler to 0.1 cm • 2 mm drill bit and drill • sink or basin to collect water • stopclock reading to 0.01 s • vernier caliper • adhesive tape • red food colouring Question 2 Requirements • 1 × 820 μF capacitor > 2 V working voltage • 1 × 120 μF capacitor > 2 V working voltage • 1 × red, 1 × black 4mm binding post panel mount • 2 × 4 mm connecting wire • white adhesive labels • SPDT switch • enclosure 85 × 60 × 40 mm or larger • 1.5 V cell • 1.5 V cell holder • digital voltmeter range 0 – 2 V, reading to 0.001V

13119 10 (a) State the principle of superposition. [2] (b) Interference effects can be demonstrated using sound waves. O signal generator speakers 0.80 m 1.12 m X Y Fig. 10.1 Two loudspeakers connected to the same signal generator are placed 0.80 m apart as in Fig. 10.1. Students walking along the line XY at a distance of 1.12 m from the speakers can hear variations in the loudness of the sound. Student A reports hearing loud sounds at 42 cm intervals and Student B at 44 cm intervals. Both agree that the loudest sound can be heard at point O, equidistant from both speakers. 13119 [Turn over (i) Explain why a loud sound is heard at point O. [2] (ii) By averaging the results of the two students, estimate the frequency of the sound being generated. The speed of sound in air is 334 m s−1. Give your answer to two significant figures. Frequency =               Hz [6]

13119 11 Diamond has a refractive index of 2.42. (a) Show that the critical angle for diamond is 24°. [2] (b) Pieces of diamond are cut so as to ‘sparkle’. This is partly due to the phenomenon of total internal reflection of light within the stone. A ray of white light incident at 90° to the surface of a cut diamond is shown in Fig. 11.1. A C B 100 40 40 Fig. 11.1 (i) Explain why the ray has taken the path shown after striking boundary AB. [2] 13119 (ii) Continue the path of the ray on Fig. 11.1 to show the path it follows before and just after striking boundary BC. Draw the normal line and include a value for the angle of incidence at the boundary BC. [3] (iii) Diamonds which are ‘shallow cut’, such as the one in Fig. 11.2, would not sparkle in the same manner. Explain why this is the case. You may illustrate your answer by continuing the path of the ray after striking boundary EF on Fig. 11.2. [2] 140 20 E F Fig. 11.2 THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER 13119 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 13119 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Total Marks Examiner Number SPH21/6 262603 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE DATA AND FORMULAE SHEET Physics [SPH11/SPH21] ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY General Certifi cate of Education Assessment Units AS 1 and AS 2 11378.02 11378.02 2 Data and Formulae Sheet for AS 1 and AS 2 Values of constants speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1 elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10–19 C the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg acceleration of free fall on the Earth’s surface g = 9.81 m s–2 electron volt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19 J the Hubble constant H0 ≈ 2.4 × 10–18 s–1 Useful formulae The following equations may be useful in answering some of the questions in the examination: Mechanics conservation of energy 1 2 mv 2 – 1 2 mu 2 = Fs for a constant force Waves two-source interference λ = ay d diffraction grating d sinθ = nλ 11378.02 3 Light lens equation 1 u 1 v 1 f + = Electricity terminal potential difference V = E – Ir (e.m.f., E; Internal Resistance, r) potential divider Vout = R1Vin R1 + R2 Particles and photons Einstein’s equation 1 2 mv max 2 = hf – hf0 de Broglie equation λ = h p Astronomy red shift z = Δλ λ recession speed z = v c Hubble’s law v = H0 d 11378.02 4

4 13142.03 Question 1 Requirements • 2 × 1 ‘magnadur’ or ‘alnico’ magnets (e.g. Timstar MA10130) • retort stand, boss and clamp • string • stop-clock • half metre rule • 30 cm ruler • 2 cm cube block of non-magnetic material • blu-tac • tape Preparation Clamp the half metre rule horizontally from the retort stand. Suspend one of the magnets from the half metre rule using the string as shown in Fig 1.1. The magnet can be taped to the string. The magnet should be between 40–42 cm below the half metre rule. Ensure that the magnet is horizontal. Front view Side view half metre rule string magnets magnets y y A B Fig 1.1 Use blu-tac to stick the other magnet onto the desk directly below the suspended magnet so that the two magnets attract. Adjust the clamp in the retort stand until the distance between the magnets is approx. 5.5 cm. Place a small piece of blu-tac on the cube. Set the cube and stop- clock close to the apparatus Action at Changeover Remove the magnet from the cube and stick the magnet to the desk in its original position. Set the cube close to the apparatus. Check that the height of the suspended magnet has not been adjusted. Reset the stop-clock.

5 13142.03 Question 2 Requirements • 20 ml syringe with 1 ml divisions, with a circular end on the plunger • balance measuring to 1 g, capable of measuring up to at least 2000 g • vernier caliper • sealant for syringe, e.g. glue Preparation Trap 20 cm3 of air in the syringe and seal the end of the syringe, (e.g. by using glue or heating the end of the syringe). Place the apparatus on the bench. Zero the balance. Action at changeover Rearrange apparatus on the bench. Check that the plunger and syringe are as in original set-up. Zero the balance.

6 13142.03 Question 3 Requirements • 3 × 1.5 V cells • 68 Ω resistor in component holder • 3.9 Ω resistor • voltmeter range 0–20V, reading to 0.01 V • milliammeter range 0–200 mA reading to 0.1 mA • connecting wires (8, may vary depending on set up) • 2 × opaque box capable of holding two cells in series Preparation Connect two of the cells in series and place them in a box. Connect a connecting wire to each end of the cells so they protrude from the ends of the box. Label the box ‘Cell A’ and clearly mark the polarity. Connect the remaining cell in series with the 3.9 Ω resistor and place them in the other box. Connect a connecting wire to the open end of the cell and also the open end of the resistor so they protrude from the ends of the box. Label the box ‘Cell B’ and mark the polarity on the box. Label the 68 Ω resistor R. Before the examination Connect ‘Cell A’ and ‘Cell B’ in series and connect the voltmeter across them so it is measuring the e.m.f.. Set the remainder of the apparatus on the bench. Action at Changeover Disconnect the circuit and connect the voltmeter across the cells in series as at the start of the experiment. Check that the e.m.f. is at a value of approx. 4.5 V.

7 13142.03 Question 4 Requirements • 15 cm focal length converging lens • lens holder • screen – plain white paper and screen holder • metre rule • power supply 4 light box • ray box • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10 ±1 mm) and crosswires, as shown in Fig. 4.1 used in 2018 AS 3A Illuminated object (washer and cross) construction. Measure the height H of the centre of the lens, mounted in the lens holder above the surface of the bench. Take a sheet of stiff card and use a sharp knife to cut a square aperture of side 40 mm so that the centre of the square is a distance H from the marked edge of the card. The width W of the card depends on the dimensions of the lens holder. Cut a piece of tracing or greaseproof paper about 60 mm square. In the centre of this square use a fi ne felt tip pen (or similar) to mark an “X” with the arms at least 10 mm long. Place the washer over the “X” so that the intersection of the arms is at the centre of the circular hole in the washer. Using transparent self-adhesive tape, attach the washer to the tracing paper. Avoid covering any part of the hole in the washer. Place the tracing paper on the card so that the washer is at the centre of the 40 mm square aperture, with the washer inside the opening. Tape the tracing paper to the cardboard. The completed object is illustrated in Fig. 4.1 tracing paper 60 mm × 60 mm aperture 40 mm × 40 mm washer 10 mm internal diameter tape cardboard marked edge W H Fig. 4.1 Washer and “X” object (not to scale) 13142.03 Preparation Set the metre rule on the desk and place the illuminated washer at the zero mark and the screen at the 100 cm mark. Place the lens in the lens holder and set the lens holder at the 50 cm mark. Action at changeover Reposition the lens holder to the 50 cm mark and check the object and screen are at the 0 and 100 cm marks. 13142.02 ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY (AS) General Certificate of Education 2022 APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST Physics Assessment Unit AS 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [SPH31] TUESDAY 10 MAY, MORNING 2 13142.02 PHYSICS UNIT 3 (AS 3A) APPARATUS AND MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR PRACTICAL ASSESSMENT CONFIDENTIAL This document gives preliminary information on the apparatus and materials required for the AS Practical Assessment. Information about the apparatus and materials required for this assessment must NOT be communicated to students. If apparatus/materials have their serial code and/or manufacturer specifi ed then it is essential that centres use this exact apparatus/material. On receipt of this APPARATUS AND MATERIALS LIST, centres must contact Gavin Gray, ggray@ccea.org.uk immediately if they have difficulty in sourcing the specified apparatus or materials. Teachers will be given detailed instructions for setting up the experiment in the Confi dential Instructions for Physics (Advanced Subsidiary) Practical Test, to which they will have confi dential access from April 2022. Teachers will have confi dential access to a copy of the experimental test two working days (48 hours) before the start of the assessment. The AS 3 Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills consisting of 4 short experimental tests (40 marks). The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. 3 13142.02 The apparatus in the following list will allow for one experiment to be set up for the practical test which makes up questions 1–4. In other words, each set of apparatus (as listed on pages 4 and 5) will accommodate four candidates when doing the circus of experiments. The apparatus can be used for alternative sessions according to the following schedule: Tuesday 10 May - Physics AS 3A (SPH31) (Main Session) 9.15 am–10.15 am (First Alternative) 10.30 am–11.30 am (Second Alternative) 11.45 am–12.45 pm (Third Alternative) 1.15 pm–2.15 pm (Fourth Alternative) 2.30 pm–3.30 pm One set of apparatus for AS 3A (SPH31) will therefore be suffi cient for twenty candidates on Tuesday 10 May if the Main Session and all four alternatives are used. A laboratory may contain one, two, three or more sets of apparatus. This means that four, eight, twelve or more candidates can be accommodated in the same session. To maintain the confi dentiality of details of the practical tests, candidates entered for any of the alternative sessions must be segregated within the centre so that there can be no communication with candidates who have taken an earlier test in any centre. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Tests from the suppliers as soon as possible.

4 13142.02 Question 1 Requirements • 2 × ‘magnadur’ or ‘alnico’ bar magnets (e.g. Timstar MA 10130) • retort stand, boss and clamp • string • stop-clock • half metre rule • 30 cm ruler • 2 cm cube block of non-magnetic material • blu-tac • tape Question 2 Requirements • 20 ml syringe with 1 ml divisions, with a circular end on the plunger • balance measuring to 1 g, capable of measuring up to at least 2000 g • vernier caliper • sealant for syringe e.g. glue Question 3 Requirements • 3 × 1.5 V cells • 68 Ω resistor in component holder • 3.9 Ω resistor • voltmeter range 0–20V, reading to 0.01V • milliammeter range 0–200 mA, reading to 0.1 mA • connecting wires (8, may vary depending on set-up) • 2 × opaque boxes capable of holding two cells in series

5 13142.02 Question 4 Requirements • 15 cm focal length converging lens • lens holder • screen – plain white paper and screen holder • metre rule • power supply 4 light box • ray box • Constructed illuminated object (washer with internal diameter 10 ± 1 mm) and crosswires, as shown in Fig 4.1 (used in 2018 AS 3A) tracing paper 60 mm × 60 mm aperture 40 mm × 40 mm washer 10 mm internal diameter tape cardboard marked edge W H Fig. 4.1 Washer and “X” object (not to scale) 6 13142.02 7 13142.02

13098 5 A pivot is placed under the centre of a non-uniform wooden pole and the pole tilts as shown in Fig. 5.1. Fig. 5.1 (a) (i) How can you tell from the diagram that the pole is non-uniform? [1] (ii) On Fig. 5.1, mark a possible location for the centre of gravity of the pole. Label this point X. [1] (iii) Describe how the position of the centre of gravity could be located. [2] 13098 (b) Assume the position of the centre of gravity of the wooden pole is known. Using a mass of known value and the arrangement shown in Fig. 5.1, describe an experimental procedure that uses the principle of moments to obtain an accurate value for the mass of the pole. [5] THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. Examiner Number SPH32/6 262686 DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 Total Marks

page 03 Total marks — 25 Attempt ALL questions 1. A ball is thrown vertically upwards and falls back to its starting position. The acceleration‑time graph represents the motion of the ball. a t 0 Which of the following velocity‑time graphs represents the same motion? A B C D E v 0 t v 0 t v 0 t v 0 t v 0 t [Turn over

page 04 2. A student uses the apparatus shown to determine the acceleration of a trolley as it moves down a ramp. card trolley P ramp light gate Q electronic timer The trolley is released from rest at point P and moves down the ramp. A card attached to the trolley passes through a light gate at point Q. The time for the card to pass through the light gate is displayed on the electronic timer. The vehicle’s acceleration a is determined using the relationship 2 2 2 v u as   The student makes the following statements about the terms u, s, and v: I u = 0 m s−1 II s = the length of the card III distance between P and Q time displayed on timer v  Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D I and III only E I, II and III

page 05 3. A spacecraft unloads cargo on the surface of the Moon. The gravitational field strength on the Moon is 1.6 N kg−1. package ramp 34° surface of the Moon spacecraft A package of mass 3.0 kg moves down the ramp. The component of the weight of the package acting parallel to the ramp is: A 0.89 N B 2.7 N C 4.0 N D 4.8 N E 16 N. [Turn over

page 06 4. Two blocks are suspended from a ceiling by ropes as shown. X 12 kg Y 15 kg Which row in the table shows the tension in the rope at point X and the tension in the rope at point Y? Tension at point X (N) Tension at point Y (N) A 27 15 B 120 29 C 120 150 D 260 29 E 260 150

page 07 5. During an experiment a student inside a lift stands on a newton balance. lift newton balance not to scale 1.2 m s−2 The mass of the student is 50.0 kg. The lift accelerates upwards at 1.2 m s−2. The reading on the newton balance is: A 60 N B 430 N C 490 N D 550 N E 590 N. 6. Water flows at a rate of 1.0 × 106 kg per second over the Victoria Falls. The Victoria Falls are 120 m high. The total power delivered by the water in falling through 120 m is: A 1.2 × 1012 W B 1.2 × 109 W C 1.2 × 108 W D 8.5 × 10−10 W E 8.5 × 10−11 W. [Turn over

page 08 7. A spacecraft passes the Earth at a speed of 0.4c. A light on the spacecraft pulses on and off. A passenger on the spacecraft measures the time between the pulses as 2.5 s. An observer on Earth measures the time between the pulses as: A 2.3 s B 2.5 s C 2.7 s D 3.0 s E 3.2 s. 8. A student makes the following statements about the expanding Universe: I The evidence supporting the existence of dark matter comes from estimations of the mass of galaxies. II The evidence supporting the existence of dark energy comes from the accelerating rate of expansion of the Universe. III The peak wavelength of radiation emitted by hotter stars is longer than that for cooler stars. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I, II and III 9. A police car is travelling at a constant speed of 31.0 m s−1 towards a stationary observer. The siren on the car emits a sound with a frequency of 820 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m s−1. The frequency of the sound heard by the observer is: A 745 Hz B 751 Hz C 820 Hz D 895 Hz E 902 Hz.

page 09 10. A proton enters a region of magnetic field as shown. proton region of magnetic field from left to right The direction of the force exerted by the magnetic field on the proton as it enters the field is: A out of the page B into the page C to the left D to the right E towards the bottom of the page. 11. The masses of three particles are shown. Particle Mass (kg) Electron 9.11 × 10−31 Proton 1.673 × 10−27 Higgs boson 2.22 × 10−25 How many orders of magnitude greater is the mass of a Higgs boson compared to the mass of a proton? A 7.54 × 10−3 B 2 C 5 D 133 E 2.44 × 105 [Turn over

page 10 12. A proton consists of two up quarks and a down quark. A student makes the following statements about protons: I Protons are baryons. II Protons are hadrons. III Protons are fermions. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and II only E I, II and III 13. The following statement represents part of a radioactive decay series. α β 214 83 X Y Bi   Nucleus X undergoes alpha emission to produce nucleus Y. Nucleus Y then undergoes beta emission. Nucleus X is: A 218 85At B 214 82Pb C 218 84Po D 218 86Rn E 210 80Hg.

page 11 14. The following statement represents a nuclear reaction. 240 236 4 94 92 2 Pu U He   The total mass of the particles before the reaction is 398.626 × 10−27 kg. The total mass of the particles after the reaction is 398.615 × 10−27 kg. The energy released in this reaction is: A 1.1 × 10−29 J B 3.3 × 10−21 J C 5.0 × 10−13 J D 9.9 × 10−13 J E 3.6 × 10−8 J. 15. The irradiance of light incident on a surface from a point source is 20.0 W m−2. The distance between the point source and the surface is 5.0 m. The point source is now moved to a distance of 25.0 m from the surface. The irradiance of the light incident on the surface is now: A 0.032 W m−2 B 0.80 W m−2 C 1.2 W m−2 D 4.0 W m−2 E 100 W m−2. [Turn over

page 12 16. Light from a laser is incident on a grating as shown. laser light grating screen maximum maximum maximum maximum maximum A series of interference maxima are observed on the screen. A student makes the following statements about the interference pattern observed on the screen: I Increasing the distance between the grating and the screen increases the distance between the observed maxima. II Increasing the distance between the laser and the grating increases the distance between the observed maxima. III Decreasing the distance between the slits on the grating decreases the distance between the observed maxima. Which of the statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and III only D II and III only E I, II and III

page 13 17. Which row in the table shows what happens to the speed, frequency, and wavelength of red light as it passes from diamond into air? Speed Frequency Wavelength A decreases decreases no change B decreases no change decreases C decreases increases increases D increases no change increases E increases increases increases 18. The output from a signal generator is connected to an oscilloscope. The trace seen on the oscilloscope screen is shown. div div The Y‑gain setting on the oscilloscope is 2.0 V/div. The time base setting on the oscilloscope is 5 ms/div. Which row in the table gives the rms voltage and the frequency of the output from the signal generator? rms voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) A 4.2 25 B 4.2 40 C 6.0 40 D 6.0 200 E 8.5 25 [Turn over

page 14 19. Three resistors are connected to a 3.0 V power supply as shown. +3.0 V 0 V 9.0 Ω 6.0 Ω 6.0 Ω The power supply has negligible internal resistance. The power dissipated in the circuit is: A 0.25 W B 0.43 W C 0.75 W D 2.1 W E 4.0 W. 20. Six resistors, each of resistance 5 Ω, are connected to a 12 V power supply as shown. 12 V + − 5 Ω 5 Ω 5 Ω 5 Ω 5 Ω 5 Ω X Y The power supply has negligible internal resistance. Which row in the table shows the total circuit resistance and the potential difference across X and Y? Total circuit resistance (Ω) Potential difference across X and Y (V) A 15 2 B 15 4 C 20 6 D 30 8 E 30 12

page 15 21. A circuit is set up as shown. 12 V 4.0 Ω A The resistance of the variable resistor is set to 6.0 Ω. The lost volts due to the internal resistance of the battery is: A 1.2 V B 4.8 V C 6.0 V D 7.2 V E 8.0 V. 22. A circuit is set up as shown. 12 V 220 µF V The battery has negligible internal resistance. The capacitor is initially uncharged. The switch is now closed. When the reading on the voltmeter is 7.0 V, the charge stored on the capacitor is: A 3.1 × 10−5 C B 4.4 × 10−5 C C 1.1 × 10−3 C D 1.5 × 10−3 C E 2.6 × 10−3 C. [Turn over

page 16 23. A circuit is set up as shown. S R C VR VC A The capacitor is initially uncharged. Switch S is closed. Which graphs show how the potential difference VR across resistor R, the potential difference VC across capacitor C, and the current I in the circuit, vary with time t as the capacitor charges? A VR 0 t 0 t VC 0 t I B C D E VR 0 t 0 t VC 0 t I VR 0 t 0 t VC 0 t I VR 0 t 0 t VC 0 t I VR 0 t 0 t VC 0 t I

page 17 24. Which row in the table describes the conduction band and the gap between the conduction band and the valence band in an insulator? Conduction band Gap between conduction band and valence band A unfilled bands overlap B full bands overlap C unfilled large gap D full small gap E full large gap 25. Astronomers use the following relationship to estimate the mass M of a galaxy 2 v r M G  where v is the orbital speed of a star in the outer regions of the galaxy, in m s−1 r is the orbital radius of the star, in m G is the Universal Constant of Gravitation. A star orbits at a radius of 4.0 × 1020 m in the outer regions of the Triangulum galaxy. The orbital speed of the star is 120 km s−1. Based on this information, the mass of the Triangulum galaxy is: A 3.8 × 1020 kg B 7.2 × 1032 kg C 8.6 × 1034 kg D 7.2 × 1035 kg E 8.6 × 1040 kg. [END OF QUESTION PAPER] page 18 SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK page 19 SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK page 20 [BLANK PAGE] DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE

13548 10 The speed of sound was measured using a resonance tube arrangement as shown in Fig. 10.1. A loudspeaker was placed above the open end of the tube. The length L of the tube is 75 cm. The signal frequency was raised from 0 Hz until an exceptionally loud sound was heard for the first time. This frequency is called the fundamental frequency fo. loudspeaker resonance tube to signal generator L 75 cm Fig. 10.1 (a) Resonance is the effect which results in an exceptionally loud sound being heard. Explain why resonance occurs. [2] 13548 (b) The method described will identify the first position of resonance. (i) On Fig. 10.1 label the position of a node with the letter N and the position of an antinode with the letter A for the first position of resonance. [1] (ii) Describe how the air particles in the resonance tube are behaving at N and A. N A [2] (iii) The fundamental frequency fo is 114 Hz when the first position of resonance is identified. Use this information to calculate the speed of sound in air. Speed =                           m s-1 [3] (iv) The frequency is increased from 114 Hz until the next position of resonance is identified. Calculate the frequency at which this will occur. Frequency =               Hz [2] THIS IS THE END OF THE QUESTION PAPER 13548 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE 13548 BLANK PAGE DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE Permission to reproduce all copyright material has been applied for. In some cases, efforts to contact copyright holders may have been unsuccessful and CCEA will be happy to rectify any omissions of acknowledgement in future if notified. DO NOT WRITE ON THIS PAGE SPH21/5 276070 For Examiner’s use only Question Number Marks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Total Marks Examiner Number DATA AND FORMULAE SHEET Physics [SPH11/SPH21] ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY General Certifi cate of Education Assessment Units AS 1 and AS 2 11378.02 11378.02 2 Data and Formulae Sheet for AS 1 and AS 2 Values of constants speed of light in a vacuum c = 3.00 × 108 m s–1 elementary charge e = 1.60 × 10–19 C the Planck constant h = 6.63 × 10–34 J s mass of electron me = 9.11 × 10–31 kg mass of proton mp = 1.67 × 10–27 kg acceleration of free fall on the Earth’s surface g = 9.81 m s–2 electron volt 1 eV = 1.60 × 10–19 J the Hubble constant H0 ≈ 2.4 × 10–18 s–1 Useful formulae The following equations may be useful in answering some of the questions in the examination: Mechanics conservation of energy 1 2 mv 2 – 1 2 mu 2 = Fs for a constant force Waves two-source interference λ = ay d diffraction grating d sinθ = nλ 11378.02 3 Light lens equation 1 u 1 v 1 f + = Electricity terminal potential difference V = E – Ir (e.m.f., E; Internal Resistance, r) potential divider Vout = R1Vin R1 + R2 Particles and photons Einstein’s equation 1 2 mv max 2 = hf – hf0 de Broglie equation λ = h p Astronomy red shift z = Δλ λ recession speed z = v c Hubble’s law v = H0 d 11378.02 4

4 13681.10R Question 1 Requirements • 22 Ω resistor × 5 • Component holder × 3 • Opaque box to hold component holder × 3 • Connecting leads × 10 • Milliammeter to read up to 200 mA to 0.1 mA • Voltmeter to read to 0.01 V • 1.5 V cell in holder • Switch Question 2 Requirements • Newtonmeter 0–10 N to 0.1 N × 2 • Pulley to be hung from or clamped to retort stand × 2 • Retort stand, 75 cm tall × 2 • G clamp × 2 • String • 100 g mass hanger × 2 • 50 g masses × 4 • Sand • Small plastic bag such as a food storage bag • Paperclip • Protractor to 1°

5 13681.10R Question 3 Requirements • Retort stand, boss head and clamp • Granulated sugar • Plastic tray, dimensions approx. 20 cm × 15 cm, depth 3–5 cm • Metre rule • Marble, approx 1.5 cm diameter • Vernier caliper • 30 cm ruler Question 4 Requirements • Ice, roughly crushed • Water • 250 ml beaker × 3 • Electronic scales to measure up to 200 g to 0.1 g • Thermometer • Kettle (1 per room) 13681.03 ADVANCED SUBSIDIARY (AS) General Certificate of Education 2023 CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS Physics Assessment Unit AS 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [SPH31] WEDNESDAY 10 MAY, MORNING 2 13681.03 1 Confidential Instructions These instructions will give detailed guidance on setting up and testing the apparatus and materials to be used. Again, information contained within the Confidential Instructions must not be relayed to candidates under any circumstances. If at this point, centres find that the testing process produces results different to those specified in the Confidential Instructions, they must contact the CCEA Science Subject Officer (ggray@ccea.org.uk) immediately. 2 Final Apparatus Testing The practical assessment question paper will be made available to the Head of Physics two working days before the timetabled starting time so that teachers and technicians can carry out a final test on the experiments. If on checking the apparatus gives unexpected results, the CCEA Physics Subject Officer should be contacted immediately (ggray@ccea.org.uk). If the problem cannot be resolved, then the centre must e-mail the CCEA Physics Subject Officer stating the centre name and number, the specific nature of the problem and the range of anomalous results produced. CCEA will respond by acknowledging receipt of the e-mail. If you do not receive a response within 24 hours, please contact the CCEA Physics Subject Officer by telephone (028 90261200 Ext 2270) to confirm that CCEA has received your e-mail. 3 Practical Assessment AS 3A The AS 3A Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills comprised of 4 short experimental tests. The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. Some of this time will be set aside for supervisors to re-set the apparatus ready for the next candidates. The assessment should be run as a circus of experiments with candidates moving to the next experiment at the designated time. The assessment should be timed as follows: Questions Time Q1 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q2 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q3 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q4 (Short practical test) 12 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes End of test write-up 4 minutes At the end of each 12 minute period, candidates must stop using the apparatus. During each 2 minute changeover period candidates may write up anything they have not completed however they will not have access to the apparatus. At the end of the test a 4 minute period is provided for candidates to complete their answer to any question, however they will not have access to the apparatus. 3 13681.03 4 After the Practical Assessments When the individual exam sessions have finished, please return the AS 3A practical scripts together with the corresponding advice notes to the examinations officer (EO). We will collect these by the day after the examination. If we don’t, please contact us immediately to arrange another time for collection. Where the centre finds that a candidate may have been disadvantaged because the apparatus did not function as intended, the supervising teachers should make a report to the EO. The EO will forward the confidential report on the issue and the candidates affected to the centre support section at CCEA for special consideration. Candidates should be identified by their examination number. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Tests from the suppliers as soon as possible.

4 13681.03 Question 1 Requirements • 22 Ω resistor × 5 • Component holder × 3 • Opaque box to hold component holder × 3 • Connecting leads × 10 • Milliammeter to read up to 200 mA to 0.1 mA • Voltmeter to read to 0.01 V • 1.5 V cell in holder • Switch Preparation Place one of the resistors into a component holder. Connect two of the remaining resistors in series and place in a component holder. Connect the remaining two resistors in parallel and place in a component holder. Add a connecting lead to each end of the three component holders. Place each component holder into an opaque box with the end of the connecting leads exposed to enable connection to another component in a circuit. Label the box containing the resistors in parallel ‘X’, the box containing the single resistor ‘Y’ and the box containing the resistors in series ‘Z’. Before the examination Set all the apparatus on the desk separately. Set the voltmeter and ammeter to the correct settings and turn them on. Action at changeover Return the apparatus to the original arrangement on the desk. Check the settings on the meters and their batteries.

5 13681.03 Question 2 Requirements • Newtonmeter 0–10 N to 0.1 N × 2 • Pulley to be hung from or clamped to retort stand × 2 • Retort stand, 75 cm tall × 2 • G-clamp × 2 • String • 100 g mass hanger × 2 • 50 g masses × 4 • Sand • Small plastic bag such as a food storage bag • Paperclip • Protractor to 1° Preparation Fill the plastic bag with approximately 120 g of sand. Tie a knot in the top of the bag. Open the paperclip out and hook one end through the knot, leaving the other end to act as a hanger as shown in Fig 2.1. Fig 2.1 Place a 50 g mass on each mass hanger. 6 13681.03 Before the examination Clamp a pulley close to the top of each retort stand ensuring that both pulleys are at the same height. Use the G-clamps to clamp the retort stands to the desk. Use the string and newtonmeters to set up the arrangement shown in Fig 2.2. Tie either end of a string (approx length 6 cm) to the hooks of the newtonmeters. Attach a small loop to the centre of this string. From the other end of each newtonmeter tie a string that will pass over the pulley and attach to a mass hanger with a 50 g mass added. Fig. 2.2 Check that, when the bag of sand is hung from the loop, the bag does not touch the bench and the mass hangers do not hit the pulleys, as shown in Fig. 2.3 Fig. 2.3 7 13681.03 When a spare 50 g mass is added to each hanger, check that the newtonmeters do not hit the pulleys, as shown in Fig. 2.4 Fig 2.4 Action at changeover Remove the two spare 50 g masses and the bag of sand and set them close to the apparatus. Set the protractor close to the apparatus so returning the apparatus to its original arrangement (as in Fig 2.2).

8 13681.03 Question 3 Requirements • Retort stand, boss head and clamp • Granulated sugar • Plastic tray, dimensions approx. 20 cm × 15 cm, depth 3–5 cm • Metre rule • Marble, approx 1.5 cm diameter • Vernier caliper • 30 cm ruler Preparation Fill the tray with the sugar so that the surface of the sugar is approx. 0.5 cm below the edge of the tray. Before the examination Clamp the metre rule into the retort stand and set the zero of the metre rule at the surface level of the sugar as shown in Fig 3.1. Check that the surface of the sugar is fl at. metre rule clamp surface retort stand Fig 3.1 Place the marble and the 30 cm ruler close to the apparatus. Action at changeover Return the apparatus to its original arrangement on the desk. Smooth the surface of the sugar.

9 13681.03 Question 4 Requirements • Ice, roughly crushed • Water • 250 ml beaker × 3 • Electronic scales to measure up to 200 g to 0.1 g • Thermometer • Kettle (1 per room) Before the examination Boil the water and pour approx. 70 ml of water into one of the beakers. When the candidate begins the experiment, the water should have cooled to a temp of approx. 70 °C. Place approx 40 g of ice into a second beaker. Leave the remaining beaker, the scales and the thermometer on the desk. Action at changeover Replace the beakers, with ice and water in two and an empty beaker on the desk. Return the scales to zero. Place the thermometer on the desk.

3 13670.04 Question 1 Requirements • Pendulum bob, string and split cork • Retort stand (height at least 75 cm) • Clamp and boss × 2 • Stopclock to 0.01 s • Metre rule • G clamp Question 2 Requirements • 1000 F capacitor • 22 k resistor • Masking tape • Variable Power Supply to supply 5V D.C. • Resistance substitution box with 10 k, 22 k, 47 k, 100 k and 220 k values. E.g. Philip Harris B8H27234 • Digital Voltmeter 0–20 V to 0.01 V • Connecting leads (approx. 9) • Stopclock to 0.01s • Component holders × 2 • Sticky labels • Two way switch 13670.13 RRR ADVANCED General Certificate of Education 2023 CONFIDENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS Physics Assessment Unit A2 3A Practical Techniques and Data Analysis [APH31] FRIDAY 12 MAY, MORNING 2 13670.13 RRR 1 Confidential Instructions These instructions will give detailed guidance on setting up and testing the apparatus and materials to be used. Again, information contained within the Confidential Instructions must not be relayed to candidates under any circumstances. If at this point, centres find that the testing process produces results different to those specified in the Confidential Instructions, they must contact the CCEA Science Officer (ggray@ccea. org.uk) immediately. 2 Final Apparatus Testing The practical assessment question paper will be made available to the Head of Physics two working days before the timetabled starting time so that teachers and technicians can carry out a final test on the experiments. If on checking the apparatus gives unexpected results, the CCEA Physics Subject Officer should be contacted immediately (ggray@ccea.org.uk), if the problem cannot be resolved. Then the centre must e-mail the CCEA Physics Subject Officer stating the centre name and number, the specific nature of the problem and the range of anomalous results produced. CCEA will respond by acknowledging receipt of the e-mail. If you do not receive a response within 24 hours, please contact the CCEA Physics Subject Officer by telephone (028 90261200) to confirm that CCEA has received your e-mail. 3 Practical Assessment A2 3A The A2 3A Practical Techniques Assessment is a test of practical skills comprised of 2 experimental tests. The duration of the assessment is 1 hour. Some of this time will be set aside for supervisors to re-set the apparatus ready for the next candidates. The assessment should be run as a circus of experiments with candidates moving to the next experiment at the designated time. The assessment should be timed as follows: Questions Time Q1 (practical test) 26 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes Q2 (practical test) 26 minutes Changeover and practical write-up 2 minutes End of test write-up 4 minutes At the end of the 26 minute period, candidates must stop using the apparatus. During each 2 minute changeover period candidates may continue with their write up, however they will not have access to the apparatus. At the end of the test a 4 minute period is provided to complete their answer to any question, but will not have access to the apparatus. 4 After the Practical Assessments When the individual exam sessions have finished, please return the A2 3A practical scripts together with the corresponding advice notes to the examinations officer (EO). We will collect these by the day after the examination. If we don’t, please contact us immediately to arrange another time for collection. Where the centre finds that a candidate may have been disadvantaged because the apparatus did not function as intended, the supervising teachers should make a report to the EO. The EO will forward the confidential report on the issue and the candidates affected to the centre support section at CCEA for special consideration. Candidates should be identified by their examination number. IMPORTANT NOTICE Centres are urged to order items needed for the Physics Practical Tests from the suppliers as soon as possible.

3 13670.13 RRR Confidential Instructions Question 1 Requirements • Pendulum bob, string and split cork • Retort stand (height at least 75 cm) • Clamp and boss × 2 • Stopclock to 0.01 s • Metre rule • G clamp Preparation Clamp the retort stand to the desk using the G clamp. Tie the pendulum bob to the end of the string. Thread the pendulum string through the split cork. Position the split cork in the jaws of the clamp. Set the length of the pendulum to be 0.700 m. Position the second boss and clamp so that the rod of the clamp obstructs the path of the pendulum at a height of approx. 5 cm above the centre of mass of the bob as shown in the diagram in Fig 1.1. Fig 1.1 Place the stopclock and metre rule beside the pendulum Action at Changeover Ensure the length of the pendulum is 0.700 m, return the position of the rod to 5cm above the centre of mass of the bob. Zero stopclock. Table 0.05 m 0.700 m

4 13670.13 RRR Question 2 Requirements • 1000 F capacitor • 22 k resistor • Masking tape • Variable Power Supply to supply at least 5V D.C. • Resistance substitution box with 10 k, 22 k, 47 k, 100 k and 220 k values. E.g. Philip Harris B8H27234 OR Resistance selector box with 6.8 k10k33k47kand100kvalues, e.g. SLS Lascells PY3110 • Digital Voltmeter 0–20 V to 0.01 V DC • Connecting leads (approx. 9) • Stopclock to 0.01 s • Component holders × 2 • Sticky labels • Two way switch Preparation Wrap both the capacitor and the 22 k resistor in masking tape so that the values of the capacitance and resistance cannot be seen. Place the capacitor and resistor into the component holders and label them ‘capacitor’ and ‘RF’. Label the resistance substitution box as ‘RV’. Set up the circuit as shown in Fig 2.1. Two-way switch Fig 2.1 5 13670.13 RRR Place a label on the two-way switch with the words ‘charge’ and ‘discharge’ on it to indicate the correct positions. Turn the two way switch to the charged position and turn the dial on the variable power supply until the voltmeter reads approximately 5V. Place a label stating ‘do not touch’ onto the dial of the power supply. Turn the dial on the resistance substitution box to 10 k. Action at Changeover Ensure the circuit is as shown in Fig 2.1. Place the two-way switch into the charged position and check the voltmeter reads approximately 5V. Turn the dial on the resistance substitution box to 10 k. Reset the stopclock to zero.

page 03 Total marks — 25 Attempt ALL questions 1. A cyclist is travelling along a straight, level road. A velocity-time (v-t) graph of the motion of the cyclist is shown. v t 0 Which pair of displacement-time (s-t) and acceleration-time (a-t) graphs represent the motion of the cyclist? A B C D E t 0 s a t 0 t 0 s a t 0 t 0 s a t 0 t 0 s a t 0 t 0 s a t 0 [Turn over

page 04 2. A hot air balloon is moving vertically. At a height of 50 m a sandbag is released. The sandbag takes 3.0 s to reach the ground. The effects of air resistance can be ignored. The initial velocity of the sandbag on release is A 2.0 m s−1 upwards B 2.0 m s−1 downwards C 17 m s−1 upwards D 17 m s−1 downwards E 31 m s−1 upwards. 3. The momentum of an object of mass 4 kg is 20 kg m s−1. The kinetic energy of the object is A 10 J B 50 J C 100 J D 400 J E 800 J.

page 05 4. A pendulum bob of mass m is released from rest at height h. The bob reaches a speed v at the lowest point of its swing. h Neglecting air resistance, the speed of the bob at its lowest point is doubled by A changing the height to 4h B changing the height to 2h C changing the height to h 2 D changing the mass of the bob to 2m E changing the mass of the bob to 2 m. [Turn over

page 06 5. A golfer strikes a golf ball as shown. 74 m s−1 31° The ball leaves the club with an initial velocity of 74 m s−1 at an angle of 31° to the horizontal. Which row in the table shows the horizontal and vertical components of the initial velocity of the golf ball? Horizontal component of the initial velocity of the golf ball (m s−1) Vertical component of the initial velocity of the golf ball (m s−1) A 38 44 B 38 63 C 44 38 D 63 38 E 63 44 6. A satellite of mass 620 kg is placed into an Earth orbit of radius 23 000 km. The mass of the Earth is 6.0 × 1024 kg. The gravitational force that the satellite experiences from the Earth in this orbit is A 4.7 × 102 N B 4.7 × 108 N C 1.1 × 1010 N D 1.1 × 1013 N E 6.9 × 1013 N.

page 07 7. Muons are created in the upper atmosphere of the Earth. The mean lifetime of these muons in their frame of reference is 2.20 µs. The muons are travelling at 0.99c relative to an observer on Earth. The observer measures the mean lifetime of these muons as A 1.56 × 10−2 s B 2.20 × 10−3 s C 1.11 × 10−4 s D 1.56 × 10−5 s E 3.10 × 10−7 s. 8. Evidence supporting the existence of dark energy comes from A estimations of the mass of galaxies B the darkness of the sky (Olbers’ paradox) C large numbers of galaxies showing redshift, rather than blueshift D the accelerating rate of expansion of the Universe E the abundance of the elements hydrogen and helium in the Universe. [Turn over

page 08 9. A student makes the following statements about the emitted radiation from stellar objects. I The peak wavelength of emitted radiation is longer for hotter objects than for cooler objects. II A ‘blue’ star is likely to be hotter than a ‘red’ star. III The radiation emitted per unit surface area per unit time is greater for hotter objects. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and III only E II and III only

page 09 10. Which of the following diagrams represents the electric field pattern between two identical positively charged particles? A B C D E [Turn over

page 10 11. A neutron consists of one up quark and two down quarks. A neutron is a A gluon B meson C baryon D lepton E boson. 12. The following statement represents a nuclear fusion reaction. 3 2 4 1 1 1 2 0 H H He n    The total mass of the particles before the reaction is 8.347 × 10−27 kg. The total mass of the particles after the reaction is 8.317 × 10−27 kg. The energy released in this reaction is A 3.0 × 10−29 J B 9.0 × 10−21 J C 1.4 × 10−12 J D 2.7 × 10−12 J E 7.5 × 10−10 J. 13. A student makes the following statements about wave particle duality. I The photoelectric effect is evidence supporting the particle model of light. II Interference is evidence supporting the wave model of light. III Photons of sufficient energy can eject electrons from the surface of metals. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and III only E I, II and III

page 11 14. Electromagnetic radiation of frequency 9.0 × 1014 Hz is incident on a clean, negatively charged metal surface. The work function of the metal is 6.1 × 10−19 J. There is no photoelectric emission from this metal caused by this radiation. This is explained by the fact that A photoemission can only occur from a positively charged metal surface B the wavelength of the incident radiation is too short C the frequency of the incident radiation is less than the threshold frequency of this metal D the work function of the metal is less than the energy of the incident photons E the number of photons per second incident on the surface of the metal is too low. 15. A ray of monochromatic light is incident on a grating. An interference pattern is observed on the screen. monochromatic light grating screen 29° 29° The angle between the central maximum and the maximum observed at the edge of the screen is 29°. The wavelength of the light is 605 nm. The separation of the slits on the grating is 5.0 × 10−6 m. The total number of maxima observed on the screen is A 4 B 7 C 8 D 9 E 15. [Turn over

page 12 16. Waves from coherent sources, S1 and S2, produce an interference pattern. Maxima are detected at the positions shown. maxima K S1 S2 The path difference S1K − S2K is 154 mm. The wavelength of the waves is A 14.0 mm B 15.4 mm C 25.7 mm D 28.0 mm E 30.8 mm.

page 13 17. Which graph shows the relationship between frequency f and wavelength λ of photons of electromagnetic radiation? A f λ B f λ C f λ D f λ E f λ [Turn over

page 14 18. A ray of monochromatic light travels from a crown glass block into water. The diagram shows three paths P, Q, and R for the ray of light in the water. ray of light crown glass water P Q R Which row in the table shows what happens to the speed and the wavelength, and the path the ray of light follows in the water? Speed Wavelength Path A decreases decreases R B decreases decreases P C stays the same stays the same Q D increases increases R E increases increases P 19. An AC power supply of negligible internal resistance is connected to an 8.0 Ω resistor. The rms voltage of the power supply is 5.0 V. The peak power dissipated in the 8.0 Ω resistor is A 0.44 W B 0.63 W C 1.4 W D 3.1 W E 6.3 W.

page 15 20. Six 36 Ω resistors are connected as shown. 36 Ω 36 Ω 36 Ω 36 Ω 36 Ω 36 Ω X Y The total resistance between points X and Y is A 6.0 Ω B 8.0 Ω C 12 Ω D 18 Ω E 24 Ω. [Turn over

page 16 21. A student carries out an experiment to determine the EMF and internal resistance of a battery using the circuit shown. V A The resistance of the variable resistor is altered and readings of voltage V and current I are taken. These readings are used to produce the following graph. V (V) I (A) 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 6.0 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.0 Which row in the table shows the EMF and internal resistance of the battery? EMF (V) Internal resistance (Ω) A 2.0 6.0 B 5.0 0.50 C 5.0 2.0 D 6.0 0.50 E 6.0 2.0

page 17 22. One coulomb per volt is equivalent to one A hertz B farad C ohm D joule E ampere. 23. A student makes the following statements about metals, insulators, and semiconductors. I In some metals, the valence and conduction bands overlap and each band is partially filled. II The band gap between the valence band and the conduction band in an insulator is large compared to the band gap in a semiconductor. III An increase in temperature decreases the conductivity of a semiconductor. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C I and II only D I and III only E II and III only [Turn over

page 18 24. A group of students carry out an experiment to investigate how quantity P depends on quantity Q. The results of the experiment are plotted on the graph shown. Q (units) 0 5 10 15 20 P (units) 8 6 4 2 0 A physics textbook states that quantity P is directly proportional to quantity Q. The students make the following statements about the line of best fit that should be drawn using all the data points plotted. I The line of best fit passes through the origin. II The line of best fit does not pass through the origin. III The line of best fit suggests the measurements have been affected by a systematic uncertainty. Which of these statements is/are correct? A I only B II only C III only D I and III only E II and III only

page 19 25. The mass m of a vibrating string can be determined using the following relationship. 4 T f mL  where f is the fundamental frequency T is the tension L is the length of the string. For a particular string the following measurements are recorded: f = 110 Hz T = 92 N L = 0.63 m. Based on this information the mass of this string is A 3.0 × 10−3 kg B 1.2 × 10−2 kg C 3.3 × 10−1 kg D 5.8 × 10−1 kg E 3.3 × 102 kg. [END OF QUESTION PAPER] page 20 SPACE FOR ROUGH WORK